Introduction 4
Instrument Cluster 10
Warning and control lights 10
Gauges 13
Entertainment Systems 17
AM/FM stereo cassette with CD 17
AM/FM stereo with in-dash six CD 21
Rear seat controls 24
Rear seat entertainment system 26
Climate Controls 42
Heater only 42
Manual heating and air conditioning 43
Electronic automatic temperature control 45
Rear window defroster 48
Lights 49
Headlamps 49
Turn signal control 52
Bulb replacement 54
Driver Controls 60
Windshield wiper/washer control 60
Steering wheel adjustment 61
Power windows 65
Mirrors 66
Speed control 70
Message center 73
Locks and Security 84
Keys 84
Locks 84
Anti-theft system 93
Table of Contents
1
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Table of Contents
Seating and Safety Restraints 96
Seating 96
Safety restraints 107
Air bags 117
Child restraints 121
Tires, Wheels and Loading 132
Tire Information 135
Tire Inflation 136
Changing tires 140
Lug Nut Torque 146
Vehicle loading 156
Trailer towing 163
Recreational towing 167
Driving 168
Starting 168
Brakes 172
Transmission operation 176
Roadside Emergencies 196
Getting roadside assistance 196
Hazard flasher switch 197
Fuel pump shut-off switch 197
Fuses and relays 198
Jump starting 204
Wrecker towing 209
Customer Assistance 210
Reporting safety defects (U.S. only) 218
Cleaning 219
Table of Contents
2
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications 225
Engine compartment 226
Engine oil 228
Battery 231
Fuel information 239
Air filter(s) 254
Part numbers 255
Refill capacities 256
Lubricant specifications 259
Accessories 265
Index 268
All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any information storage and retrieval
system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written
authorization from Ford Motor Company. Ford may change the contents without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Copyright © 2004 Ford Motor Company
Table of Contents
3
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
CONGRATULATIONS
Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford. Please take the time to get
well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook. The more
you know and understand about your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will derive from driving it.
For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the
following website:
• In the United States: www.ford.com
• In Canada: www.ford.ca
• In Australia: www.ford.com.au
• In Mexico: www.ford.com.mx
Additional owner information is given in separate publications.
This Owner’s Guide describes every option and model variant available
and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your
particular vehicle. Furthermore, due to printing cycles it may describe
options before they are generally available.
Remember to pass on this Owner’s Guide when reselling the vehicle. It
is an integral part of the vehicle.
Fuel pump shut-off switch: In the event of an accident the
safety switch will automatically cut off the fuel supply to the
engine. The switch can also be activated through sudden vibration (e.g.
collision when parking). To reset the switch, refer to the Fuel pump
shut-off switch in the Roadside Emergencies chapter.
SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION
Warning symbols in this guide
How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others? In
this guide, answers to such questions are contained in comments
highlighted by the warning triangle symbol. These comments should be
read and observed.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
Introduction
4
Warning symbols on your vehicle
When you see this symbol, it is
imperative that you consult the
relevant section of this guide before
touching or attempting adjustment
of any kind.
Protecting the environment
We must all play our part in
protecting the environment. Correct
vehicle usage and the authorized
disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant
steps towards this aim. Information in this respect is highlighted in this
guide with the tree symbol.
BREAKING-IN YOUR VEHICLE
There are no particular guidelines for breaking-in your vehicle. During
the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of driving, vary speeds frequently. This is
recommended to give the moving parts a chance to break in.
SPECIAL NOTICES
Emission warranty
The New Vehicle Limited Warranty includes Bumper-to-Bumper
Coverage, Safety Restraint Coverage, Corrosion Coverage, and 6.0L
Power Stroke Diesel Engine Coverage. In addition, your vehicle is eligible
for Emissions Defect and Emissions Performance Warranties. For a
detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered, refer to
the Warranty Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner’s
Guide.
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and
storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. This potentially
includes information about the performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle, Ford
Motor Company, Ford of Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access vehicle diagnostic information through a direct connection to your
vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
5
Event Data Recording
Other modules in your vehicle — event data recorders — are capable of
collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event. The
recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event.
The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the
occupants, potentially including information such as:
• how various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled;
• how far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal;
• how fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• where the driver was positioning the steering wheel.
To access this information, special equipment must be directly connected
to the recording modules. Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada.
Special instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic
controls.
Please read the section Supplemental restraint system (SRS)
in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter. Failure to follow
the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child or infant seats should
NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger air bag.
Notice to owners of diesel-powered vehicles
Read the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s
Guide Supplement for information regarding correct operation and
maintenance of your Diesel-powered light truck.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
6
Notice to owners of pickup trucks and utility type vehicles
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
Before you drive your vehicle, please read this Owner’s Guide carefully.
Your vehicle is not a passenger car. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury or death.
Be sure to read Driving off road in the Driving chapter.
Snowplowing
The Excursion is not recommended for snowplow installation. Ford
makes no representation as to the suitability of the Excursion for
snowplowing, in particular regarding the potential for exceeding vehicle
weight limits, airbag (SRS) deployment sensitivity, vehicle crash integrity,
or powertrain durability. The Snowplow Package Option is not available.
Middle East/North Africa vehicle specific information
For your particular global region, your vehicle may be equipped with
features and options that are different from the ones that are described
in this Owner’s Guide; therefore, a supplement has been supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the pages in the provided
supplement, you can properly identify those features, recommendations
and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. Refer to this
Owner’s Guide for all other required information and warnings.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
7
These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle.
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Safety Alert
See Owner’s Guide
Fasten Safety Belt Air Bag-Front
Air Bag-Side Child Seat
Child Seat Installation
Warning
Child Seat Lower
Anchor
Child Seat Tether
Anchor
Brake System
Anti-Lock Brake System
Brake Fluid -
Non-Petroleum Based
Powertrain Malfunction Speed Control
Master Lighting Switch Hazard Warning Flasher
Fog Lamps-Front Fuse Compartment
Fuel Pump Reset Windshield Wash/Wipe
Windshield
Defrost/Demist
Rear Window
Defrost/Demist
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
8
Vehicle Symbol Glossary
Power Windows
Front/Rear
Power Window Lockout
Child Safety Door
Lock/Unlock
Interior Luggage
Compartment Release
Symbol
Panic Alarm Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
Temperature
Do Not Open When Hot Battery
Avoid Smoking, Flames,
or Sparks
Battery Acid
Explosive Gas Fan Warning
Power Steering Fluid
Maintain Correct Fluid
Level
MAX
MIN
Emission System Engine Air Filter
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
Jack
Check fuel cap Low tire warning
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Introduction
9
WARNING LIGHTS AND CHIMES
Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious enough to cause expensive repairs. A warning light may
illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle’s functions.
Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the
bulb works. If any light remains on after starting the vehicle, have the
respective system inspected immediately.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine, it has a unique cluster,
refer to Starting the engine in your 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct
Injection Turbo Diesel Owner’s Guide Supplement.
Service engine soon: The Service
engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first
turned to the ON position to check
the bulb. Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II) has detected a malfunction. Refer to
On board diagnostics (OBD-II) in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. If the light is blinking, engine misfire is occurring which could
damage your catalytic converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced
immediately.
Under engine misfire conditions, excessive exhaust temperatures
could damage the catalytic converter, the fuel system, interior
floor coverings or other vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
C
D
H
L
H
E
F
C
H
BRAKE
PRN
D
2
SELECT
RESET
CHECK
GAGE
CK
SUSP
THEFT
TRANS
TEMP
4x4
LOW
RANGE
RPMX1000
MPH
km/h
0
20
40
60
80
00
20
40
60
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster
10
Check fuel cap (if equipped):
Illuminates when the fuel cap may
not be properly installed. Continued
driving with this light on may cause
the Service engine soon warning
light to come on. Refer to Fuel
filler cap in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
Check gage: Illuminates when any
of the following conditions has
occurred:
• The engine coolant temperature
is high.
• The engine oil pressure is low.
• The fuel gauge is at or near empty.
Brake system warning light: To
confirm the brake system warning
light is functional, it will
momentarily illuminate when the
ignition is turned to the ON position when the engine is not running, or
in a position between ON and START, or by applying the parking brake
when the ignition is turned to the ON position. If the brake system
warning light does not illuminate at this time, seek service immediately
from your dealership. Illumination after releasing the parking brake
indicates low brake fluid level and the brake system should be inspected
immediately by your servicing dealership.
Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is
dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle. Have the vehicle
checked by your dealer immediately.
Anti-lock brake system: If the
ABS light stays illuminated or
continues to flash, a malfunction has
been detected, have the system
serviced immediately. Normal
braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is
illuminated.
CHECK
GAGE
ABS
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
11
Air bag readiness: If this light fails
to illuminate when ignition is turned
to ON, continues to flash or remains
on, have the system serviced
immediately. A chime will also sound when a malfunction in the
supplemental restraint system has been detected.
Safety belt: Reminds you to fasten
your safety belt. A chime will also
sound to remind you to fasten your
safety belt.
Charging system: Illuminates when
the battery is not charging properly.
Low fuel: Illuminates when the fuel
level in the fuel tank is at or near
empty (refer to Fuel gauge in this
chapter).
Speed control: Illuminates when
the speed control is activated. Turns
off when the speed control system
is deactivated.
Transmission Tow/Haul Feature
(5R0110W 5–speed automatic
transmission) (if
equipped-Diesel engines only):
Illuminates when the Tow/Haul feature has been activated. Refer to the
Driving chapter for transmission function and operation. If the light
flashes steadily, have the system serviced immediately, damage to the
transmission could occur.
Four wheel drive low (if
equipped): Illuminates when
four-wheel drive low is engaged.
Four wheel drive indicator (if
equipped): Illuminates when
four-wheel drive is engaged.
LOW
RANGE
4x4
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
12
Securilock娂 Anti-theft system:
Flashes when the Securilock娂
Passive Anti-theft System has been
activated.
Door ajar: Illuminates when the
ignition is in the ON position and
any door is open.
Turn signal: Illuminates when the
left or right turn signal or the
hazard lights are turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a burned out bulb.
High beams: Illuminates when the
high beam headlamps are turned on.
Key-in-ignition warning chime: Sounds when the key is left in the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK or ACCESSORY position and the driver’s door
is opened.
Headlamps on warning chime: Sounds when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on, the ignition is off (the key is not in the ignition) and the
driver’s door is opened.
Parking brake ON warning chime: Sounds when the parking brake is
set, the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph
(5 km).
GAUGES
D
H
L
H
E
F
C
H
BRAKE
PRN
D
2
SELECT
RESET
CHECK
GAGE
CK
SUSP
THEFT
4x4
LOW
RANGE
C
TRANS
TEMP
RPMX1000
MPH
km/h
0
20
40
60
80
00
20
40
60
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
13
Speedometer: Indicates the
current vehicle speed.
Engine coolant temperature
gauge: Indicates engine coolant
temperature. At normal operating
temperature, the needle will be in
the normal range (between “H” and
“C”). If it enters the red section,
the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely
possible, switch off the engine
and let the engine cool.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
Odometer: Registers the total miles
(kilometers) of the vehicle.
Trip odometer: Registers the miles
(kilometers) of individual journeys.
Press the control once to switch
from the odometer to the trip
odometer. To reset the trip, press
the control again until the trip reading is 0.0 miles.
Tachometer: Indicates the engine
speed in revolutions per minute.
Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of
the scale may damage the engine.
D
PRN
D
2
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
14
Engine oil pressure gauge:
Indicates engine oil pressure. The
needle should stay in the normal
operating range (between “L” and
“H”). If the needle falls below the
normal range, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and check the engine
oil level. Add oil if needed. If the oil
level is correct, have your vehicle
checked at your dealership or by a
qualified technician.
Fuel gauge: Indicates
approximately how much fuel is left
in the fuel tank (when the ignition
is in the ON position). The fuel
gauge may vary slightly when the
vehicle is in motion or on a grade.
Refer to Filling the tank in the
Maintenance and Specifications
chapter for more information.
Transmission fluid temperature gauge: If the gauge is in the:
White area (normal) - the
transmission fluid is within the
normal operating temperature
(between “H” and “C”).
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
15
Yellow area (warning) — the
transmission fluid is higher than
normal operating temperature. This
can be caused by special operation
conditions (i.e. towing or off road
use). Refer to Special Operating
Conditions in the Scheduled
Maintenance Guide for
instructions. Operating the
transmission for extended periods of
time with the gauge in the yellow
area may cause internal transmission damage.
Altering the severity of the driving conditions is recommended to lower
the transmission temperature into the normal range.
Red area (over temperature) —
the transmission fluid is overheating.
Stop the vehicle to allow the
temperature to return to normal
range.
If the gauge is operating in the Yellow or Red area, stop the vehicle and
verify the airflow is not restricted such as snow or debris blocking airflow
through the grill. If the gauge continues to show high temperatures, see
your Ford dealer.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Instrument Cluster
16
PREMIUM AM/FM STEREO/CASSETTE/SINGLE CD (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase/decrease
volume.
2. Scan: Press to hear a brief
sampling of all listenable stations,
tape selections or CD tracks. Press
again to stop.
3. CD slot: Insert a CD with the
label side up.
SCAN
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
Entertainment Systems
17
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
4. Cassette door: Insert the
cassette with the opening to the
right.
5. Eject: Press to eject the
cassette/CD. The radio will resume
playing.
6. Tape: Press to start tape play.
Press to stop tape during
rewind/fast forward.
CD: Press to start CD play. With the
dual media audio, press CD to
toggle between single CD and CD
changer play (if equipped).
7. Mute: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again to return to the
playing media.
8. Auto: Press to set first six
strongest stations (if available) into
AM, FM1 or FM2 memory buttons;
press again to return to normal
stations.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
18
9. Clock: Press to toggle between
station mode and clock mode. Press
and hold to set the clock. Press
the
SEEK to decrease hours or
SEEK
to increase hours. Press
the TUNE to decrease minutes
or TUNE
to increase minutes. If your vehicle has a stand alone clock
this control will not function.
10. Balance: Press BAL; then press
SEL
/ to shift sound to the
left/right speakers.
Fade: Press FADE; then press
SEL
/ to shift sound to the
rear/front speakers.
11. Memory preset buttons: To
set a station: Select frequency band
AM/FM, tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound returns.
12. Shuffle (CD): Press to play
tracks in random order. Press again
to disable.
13. Compression (CD): Press to
bring soft and loud passages
together for a more consistent
listening level. A small “c” will
appear in the display to indicate that compression is enabled. Press again
to disable.
14.
Dolby威 noise reduction:
Works in tape mode only. Reduces
tape noise and hiss; press to
activate/deactivate.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
19
The Dolby威 noise reduction system is manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby威 and the double-D
symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
15. Side 1–2: Works in tape mode
only. Press to play reverse side of
the tape.
16. Fast Forward (FF): In CD
mode, press for a slow advance,
press and hold for a fast advance. In
TAPE mode, press FF to enable
Fast Forward feature. Press FF or TAPE to resume tape play.
17. Rewind (REW): In CD mode,
press for a slow reverse, press and
hold for a fast reverse. In TAPE
mode, press REW to enable the
rewind feature. Press REW or TAPE to resume tape play.
18. Select (SEL): Use with Bass,
Treble, Balance and Fade controls.
19. Bass: Press BASS; then press
SEL
/ to decrease/increase
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
SEL
/ to decrease/increase
the treble output.
20. Tune: Works in radio mode only.
Press TUNE
/ to change
frequency down/up.
FF
2
REW
1
SEL
SEEK
TUNE
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
20
21. Seek: Press and release
SEEK
/ for previous/next
strong station, selection or track.
22. AM/FM: Press to select
AM/FM1/FM2 frequency band.
PREMIUM IN-DASH SIX CD SOUND SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Seek: Press and release
SEEK
/ for previous/next
strong station, or track of current
disc.
2. Rewind: Press for a slow rewind,
press and hold for a fast rewind.
Fast forward: Press for a slow
advance, press and hold for a fast
advance.
SEEK
TUNE
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
21
3. Comp (Compression): In CD mode, press to adjust the soft and loud
passages together for a more consistent listening level. Press the COMP
control until COMP ON is displayed.
4. Mute: Press to MUTE playing
media; press again return to playing
media. In CD mode, MUTE acts as a
pause feature.
5. Eject: Press to eject a CD.
EJECTING # (desired selection) will
appear on the display. When the CD
appears in the CD slot for removal, the display reads REMOVE CD #
(desired selection). Press and hold to eject all loaded discs.
6. Bass: Press BASS; then press
SEL
/ to decrease/increase
the bass output.
Treble: Press TREB; then press
SEL
/ to decrease/increase
the treble output.
7. Select: Use with Bass, Treble,
Balance and Fade controls to adjust
levels. Use with MENU to set the
clock and engage RDS.
8. Balance: Press BAL; then press
SEL
/ to shift sound to the
left/right speakers.
Fade: Press FADE; then press
SEL
/ to shift sound to the
rear/front speakers.
9. Menu: Press MENU and SEL to
access clock mode, RDS on/off,
Traffic, Program type, Show type
and Compression modes.
Traffic: Allows you to hear traffic broadcasts. With the feature ON, press
SEEK or SCAN to find a station broadcasting a traffic report (if it is
broadcasting RDS data). Traffic information is not available in most
U.S. markets.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
22
FIND Program type: Allows you to search RDS-equipped stations for a
certain category of music format: Classic, Country, Info, Jazz, Oldies,
R&B, Religious, Rock, Soft, Top 40.
Show TYPE: Displays the station’s call letters and format.
Compression: In CD mode, press to bring soft and loud CD passages
together for a more consistent listening level.
Setting the clock: Press MENU until SELECT HOUR or SELECT MINS
is displayed. Use SEL to manually increase (
) or decrease ( ) the
hours/minutes. Press MENU again to disengage clock mode.
10. Memory presets: To set a
station: Select frequency band
AM/FM; tune to a station, press and
hold a preset button until sound
returns. In CD mode, press to move between CDs.
This radio is equipped with six station memory preset controls which
allow you to set up to six AM stations and 12 FM stations (six in FM1
and six in FM2).
11. CD: Press to select CD mode.
Seamless play: In CD mode, the
transition between the end of one
CD and the beginning of another will not contain delay time unless SEEK
or a preset control is pressed.
12. AM/FM: Press to select a
frequency band in radio mode.
Autoset: Allows you to set the
strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set
preset stations for AM/FM1/FM2 . Press and momentarily hold AM/FM.
AUTOSET will flash on the display. When the six strongest stations are
filled, the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing. If there are less
than six strong stations, the system will store the last one in the
remaining presets. Press again to disengage.
13. Power/volume: Press to turn
ON/OFF; turn to increase or
decrease volume levels.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
23
14. Load: Press to load a CD.
SELECT SLOT will appear in the
display. Select from 1–6onthe
memory presets. MOVING TO # and then LOAD CD# will appear in the
display. Insert the CD into the system, label side up. Press and hold to
load up to six discs.
15. Shuffle: In CD mode, press to
play tracks in random order. Press
SHUF to cycle through SHUF TRAC,
SHUF DISC or SHUF OFF.
16. Scan: Press to hear a brief
sampling of all listenable stations or
CD tracks. Press again to stop.
17. Disc/Tune: Radio: Press
or to manually tune down or up
the frequency band.
CD: Press
or to select the previous or next CD.
18. CD door: Insert a CD label side
up.
REAR AUDIO CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
The rear seat controls allow the middle seat passengers to operate the
radio, tape, CD or CD changer (if equipped).
To engage, simultaneously press the memory preset controls 3 and 5.
Press again to disengage.
1. Memory: Push successively to
allow rear seat passengers to scroll
through memory presets. Push in
CD changer mode (if equipped) to
advance to the next disc.
2. Seek: Press
or to access
the previous or next station,
selection or track.
3. Headphone jack: Plug a 3.5 mm headphone into the jack.
4. Headphone/speaker: Press to turn all speakers off (headphone
mode). Press again to deactivate the headphone and activate system
speakers.
VOLUME MEDIA
MEM
SEEK
5
4
26
3
1
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
24
5. Volume: Press + to increase and — to decrease volume levels. From
the rear seat controls, volume cannot be set higher than the front seat
setting.
6. Media: Push to toggle between AM, FM1, FM2, tape, CD or CD
changer mode (if equipped).
RADIO FREQUENCIES
AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC). Those frequencies are:
AM - 530, 540–1700, 1710 kHz
FM- 87.7, 87.9–107.7, 107.9 MHz
RADIO RECEPTION FACTORS
There are three factors that can affect radio reception:
• Distance/strength: The further you travel from an FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.
• Terrain: Hills, mountains, tall buildings, power lines, electric fences,
traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
• Station overload: When you pass a broadcast tower, a stronger signal
may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency
is displayed.
CASSETTE/PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Use only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or less.
• Tighten very loose tapes by inserting a finger or pencil into the hole
and turning the hub.
• Remove loose labels before inserting tapes.
• Allow tapes which have been subjected to extreme heat, humidity or
cold to reach a moderate temperature before playing.
• Clean the cassette player head with a cassette cleaning cartridge after
10–12 hours of play to maintain good sound/operation.
Don’t:
• Expose tapes to direct sunlight, extreme humidity, heat or cold.
• Leave tapes in the cassette player for a long time when not being
played.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
25
CD/CD PLAYER CARE
Do:
• Handle discs by their edges only. Never touch the playing surface.
• Inspect discs before playing. Clean only with an approved CD cleaner
and wipe from the center out.
Don’t:
• Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods
of time.
• Insert more than one disc into each slot of the CD changer magazine.
• Clean using a circular motion.
CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4.75 in (12
cm) audio compact discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable compact discs may not
function correctly when used in Ford CD players. Irregular
shaped CDs, CDs with a scratch protection film attached, and CDs
with homemade paper (adhesive) labels should not be inserted
into the CD player. The label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. It is recommended that homemade CDs be
identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive
labels. Ball point pens may damage CDs. Please contact your
dealer for further information.
AUDIO SYSTEM WARRANTY AND SERVICE
Refer to the Warranty Guide for audio system warranty information. If
service is necessary, see your dealer or qualified technician.
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Rear Seat Entertainment DVD
System which allows you to watch DVDs, play music CDs and to plug in
and play video game systems. Please review this material to become
familiar with the system features and safety information.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
26
DVD player controls
1. MAIN control
• NEXT — Press to access the next track on the CD, the next chapter
on the DVD, or to go up in cursor mode.
• PREV — Press to access the previous track on the CD, the previous
chapter on the DVD, or to go down in cursor mode.
• REV — Press to reverse in CD and DVD play modes or to move the
cursor left in the menu active mode.
• FWD —Press to advance in CD and DVD play modes or to move the
cursor right in the menu active mode.
2. PLAY/PAUSE control
Press to playback or pause the DVD.
3. DIM control
Adjust to increase (+) or decrease (-) the amount of brightness on the
screen.
4. ENTER control
Press to select the function pointed to within the active menu. May also
be used by some user interactive discs during movie play.
5. MENU control
Press to bring up the disc menu.
6. AUX control
Press to switch DVD player from play mode to auxiliary mode.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
27
7. Auxiliary jacks
Insert lines for standard video game players.
8. STOP/EJECT control
Press once to stop DVD play. Press again to eject the DVD.
9. DISPLAY (DISP) control
Press to enable on screen display of player menu and user display
adjustments.
DVD control features
Menu control
Press the MENU control to enter
into MENU mode. This allows you to
move and choose within the DVD
generated menu structure. Once in
MENU mode:
• Press the NEXT control to move
the cursor one position upward
• Press the PREV control to move
the cursor one position downward
• Press the REV control to move
the cursor left one position
• Press the FWD control to move
the cursor right one position
NEXT
PREV
REV
FWD
NEXT
PREV
REV
FWD
NEXT
PREV
REV
FWD
NEXT
PREV
REV
FWD
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
28
Next/Previous control
The NEXT (up) and PREV (down)
controls allow you to access the
next or previous track on a CD or
chapter on a DVD. When pressed,
the playing audio will mute
momentarily while the next chapter
is accessed. Press and hold to advance or reverse multiple tracks or
chapters.
REV/FWD control
Press the REV/FWD control during
playback mode to reverse or
advance at a normal speed. Press
the REV/FWD control again to
disengage the reverse/advance
action and return to normal
playback mode
Enter control
The ENTER control allows you to
select items when in MENU mode.
Press the ENTER control to select
the desired highlighted item.
CD play mode
Press NEXT during CD play to
advance to the next track. If you
press NEXT during the last track,
the system will wrap around to the
first track and begin play.
Slow play mode
To enter slow play mode, press the
PLAY/PAUSE control. Once the
system is in pause mode, press the
FWD or REV control for slow motion playback. Three different speeds
are available depending on how long the control is held. Press the
control once for slow motion playback. Press the control again to
disengage slow motion playback. Press the PLAY/PAUSE control to
return to normal playback mode.
NEXT
PREV
REV
FWD
NEXT
PREV
REV
FWD
ENTER
NEXT
PREV
REV
FWD
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
29
User menu mode
To adjust the display setting, press
DISP once and the player menu will
appear. Press DISP again to adjust
the display setting. Use the arrow controls and the ENTER controls to
select the various screen settings. (Available screen selections are 16x9,
Normal, 4x3 and Zoom).
The DVD player will read the disc type and configure the display
accordingly. Some movies have a wide screen movie format to fit a
normal 4x3 screen. In this case, the movie will have black bars on the
top and bottom. When shown on the screen, it may appear as a small
screen within the wide screen. It may be desirable to view this type of
movie in zoom mode. To enter zoom mode, press DISP once for the
player menu and again to adjust the display setting. Select zoom from
the screen settings by using the arrow and ENTER controls.
Remote control
1. REWIND control
Press to reverse the direction of the DVD movie.
2. FAST FORWARD control
Press to advance the direction of the DVD movie.
3. PLAY/STOP control
Press to play or stop the DVD movie.
DISP
REV
FWD
SEEKVOL
MODE
MEMORY
+
DISP
MNU
ENT
-
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
30
4. SEEK control
Press to reverse or advance the chapter of the DVD or the track of the
CD.
5. DISPLAY (DISP) control
Press to enable on screen display of player menu and user display
adjustments. Once the display is on, use SEEK to choose the desired
screen setting.
6. ENTER (ENT) MEMORY control
In DVD playback mode, press the control to select a designated item in
menu mode.
In stop mode, press the control to select the next radio memory preset.
7. MNU/MODE control
In DVD playback mode, press to access the disc menu.
In stop mode, press to change to a different playing media (e.g. AM, FM,
CD...)
8. VOLUME control
Press to increase (+) or decrease (-) volume level.
Battery replacement
Batteries are supplied with the
remote control unit. Since all
batteries have a limited shelf life,
replace them when the unit fails to
control the DVD player. There is a
LED indicator light on the remote
control that will illuminate when any
control is pressed.
Slide the battery cover off as shown on the remote control to access the
batteries.
The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
31
Rear seat controls
The rear seat controls allow the rear
seat passengers to operate the
radio, tape, CD, DVD or AUX (if
equipped).
Adjusting the volume from the rear seat controls
The volume control allows the rear
seat passengers to adjust the
volume level of the desired
selection.
Press the + control to increase the volume.
Press the - control to decrease the volume.
When in single play mode, the speaker volume cannot be set higher than
the current volume radio setting. When using wired headphones, (dual
play mode), the rear seat controls can change the volume setting to any
desired level.
Mode select
Press MEDIA to toggle between AM,
FM1, FM2, TAPE, CD, DVD and
AUX modes (if equipped). When
selected, the media source will
illuminate in the radio display.
• AM
AM radio frequency band
• FM1, FM2
FM radio frequency bands
• TAPE
cassette tape (if equipped)
• CD
single CD player (if equipped)
in-dash six CD player (if equipped)
VOLUME MEDIA
MEM
SEEK
VOLUME MEDIA
MEM
SEEK
VOLUME MEDIA
MEM
SEEK
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
32
• DVD/AUX
DVD player / Auxiliary line input (if equipped)
Memory preset control
In radio mode, press the MEMORY
control successively to scroll
through the memory presets in AM,
FM1 or FM2.
If your vehicle is equipped with an in-dash six CD player, press the
MEMORY control to select the next disc in the compact disc changer.
Play will begin with the first track.
Seek function
The SEEK control has varying
functions depending on which mode
is enabled.
In radio mode (AM, FM1, FM2):
Press the
control to find the next station down the frequency band.
Press the
control to find the next station up the frequency band.
In tape mode (if equipped), press the
control to access the previous
selection or
for the next selection.
In single CD mode (if equipped), press the
control to access the
previous track or
for the next track.
If equipped with an in-dash six CD player, press the
control to
access the previous track or to select the next track of the current
disc.
In AUX/DVD mode, the SEEK control is not operational.
VOLUME MEDIA
MEM
SEEK
VOLUME MEDIA
MEM
SEEK
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
33
Using wired headphones/Personal Audio Feature
Single play mode will allow all
passengers to listen to the same
media source through all speakers.
The Personal Audio Feature (dual
play) allows the front seat
passengers to listen to one source (radio, TAPE, CD, DVD, or AUX)
while the rear seat passengers listen to another. However, front and rear
seat passengers cannot listen to two different radio stations
simultaneously.
To activate from the rear seat controls, press the
/ control and
plug a 3.5mm headphone into the headphone jack. With the headphones
ON, the rear speakers will not operate. In this mode, the headphones are
enabled (dual play mode). The rear seat passengers have control over
the desired volume levels.
Press the MEDIA control to toggle to the desired media source.
Use the SEEK, VOLUME and MEM controls to make any desired
adjustments.
Press the
/ control again to engage the rear speakers and
deactivate the Personal Audio Feature. In this mode, you can adjust the
audio output to all system speakers — front and rear together. The rear
seat passengers cannot raise the volume of the system above the level on
the front radio bezel.
Parental control
Your Entertainment System allows you to have control over the rear seat
controls. The DVD system is automatically activated when the ignition is
ON. This enables rear seat passengers to utilize the Rear Seat Controls
(RSC). Once the headphone mode is activated, the
symbol will
appear in the radio display.
Press the memory preset controls 3
and 5 simultaneously on the front
audio controls to disable the rear
seat controls. They will remain disabled until the front seat passengers
“enable” them again by simultaneously pressing the 3 and 5 preset
controls. The settings of the front seat controls will always override
those of the rear seat controls.
VOLUME MEDIA
MEM
SEEK
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
34
Press the memory preset controls 2
and 4 simultaneously to toggle
between single play and the
Personal Audio Feature.
Wireless headphones (for DVD system only)
Your system is equipped with 2 sets
of wireless headphones. (Two AAA
batteries are needed to operate the
headphones.) Batteries are included.
To install the batteries, lightly press
down on the top of the left earpiece
and slide the cover off.
When replacing the batteries, use
two new batteries (alkaline
recommended) and install them
with the correct (+) and (-)
orientation.
Wireless headphone operation
To operate the headphones:
• Press the ON/OFF button on the
left-hand earpiece. The LED light
on the right-hand earpiece will
illuminate. Press again to turn off.
• Adjust the headphones to
comfortably fit your head.
• Adjust the volume control to a
comfortable listening level.
Note: The volume level of the wireless headphones can only be
controlled by the thumbwheel. Neither the remote control nor the rear
seat controls will affect the volume output of the wireless headphones.
1 2 3 4 5 6
ON OFF
ON OFF
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
35
When not using the headphones,
shut them off to preserve battery
power. The headphones will
automatically turn off after five
minutes if they have not received an
infrared audio signal from the
overhead pod.
Ensure that the line of sight
between the headphone and
infrared transmitter (mounted on
the DVD housing) is not obstructed.
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) flip-down screen
The screen rotates down to view and into the housing to store when not
in use. Be sure the screen is latched into the housing when being stored.
1. 7.0” (diagonal) active matrix liquid crystal display (LCD) screen.
2. Screen housing.
3. Dimmer switch. Press +/- to increase/decrease the brightness of the
screen.
VO
L
POWER
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
36
Playback and format
• The DVD player of your Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System can
only be used in the “playback” mode. (The DVD player does not offer
a record feature.)
• The system plays standard CDs or DVDs.
• The DVD player is only capable of playback of DVDs and CDs. The
player is not compatible with CDR/RW media.
Rear Seat Entertainment DVD System protection circuits
High temperature sensor circuit
• Excessively high temperatures may cause damage to the DVD player.
• When the temperature of the DVD player becomes too hot, the high
temperature sensor circuit stops machine operation. DVD/CD HOT will
illuminate in the radio display.
• The DVD player will remain inactive until it cools to a normal
operating temperature. Length of time to cool will vary depending on
conditions.
General operating tips
• When the engine is not running, use the system sparingly. Otherwise,
it will run the battery down.
• When the ignition is turned to OFF, the Rear Seat Entertainment DVD
System is also turned OFF. When the ignition is turned ON, the
system will begin playback from the last selected media source when
the play control is pressed.
• To disable the DVD player, simultaneously press the 3 and 5 memory
presets on the radio face. To enable the DVD player again, press the 3
and 5 presets simultaneously.
• The DVD player is only capable of reading the bottom side of a disc.
When inserting a single sided disc, the label should be up. For a
multi-sided disc, the desired play side should be down when the disc
is inserted into the player.
• The DVD player is only capable of playback of DVDs and CDs. The
player is not compatible with CDR/RW media.
• DVDs are formatted by regions. This DVD system can only play region
1 DVDs (DVDs manufactured for U.S. and Canada).
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
37
This unit is designed to play commercially pressed 12 cm (4.75
in) audio compact discs and DVDs only. Due to technical
incompatibility, certain recordable and re-recordable compact
discs may not function correctly when used in Ford DVD/CD
players. Irregular shaped discs, discs with a scratch protection
film attached, and discs with homemade paper (adhesive) labels
should not be inserted into the player. The label may peel and
cause the disc to become jammed. It is recommended that
homemade discs be identified with permanent felt tip marker
rather than adhesive labels. Ball point pens may damage discs.
Please contact your dealer for further information.
Inserting a CD/DVD
Partially insert the CD/DVD into the slot and the system will fully pull in
the disc. Inserting the disc too far could cause the disc to jam in the
system.
Inserting a CD/DVD into the DVD player automatically turns the power
ON and playback should begin.
The counter is automatically reset to 0:00:00.
Removing a CD/DVD
1. Press the STOP/EJECT control to stop playback.
2. Press the STOP/EJECT control again to eject the CD/DVD.
If the CD/DVD is not removed within the allotted time, the system will
pull the CD/DVD back into the system for safety purposes. If the
CD/DVD will not eject from the system, press and hold the EJECT
control for approximately 2 seconds. The disc should eject whether the
vehicle ignition is ON or OFF.
Playing a video game/auxiliary device
1. Connect the video line from your video game device to the YELLOW
auxiliary input jack.
2. Connect the left and right audio lines to the WHITE and RED auxiliary
input jacks respectively.
3. Press the MODE control until DVD/CD AUX (no disc in player) or
DVD/CD play (disc in player) illuminates in the radio display. If a disc is
in the system, playback should begin. To enable the aux inputs, press the
STOP control or press the AUX control on the DVD player.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
38
On-screen indicators
Each time a control is pressed, the operational status of the DVD player
is shown on the screen. The following are some possible indicators:
1. CD track
2. DVD chapter
3. SYSTEM COUNTER — displays current viewing time of desired media.
(HOURS:MINUTES:SECONDS)
4. DVD/ CD STATUS (PLAY/FF/REW/PAUSE)
5. AUDIO OUTPUT (not changeable)
6. Subtitles (specific language type - English or Spanish, dependent on
disc capability and ON/OFF selection.)
7. Camera angle (of picture) - Adjustable with cursor controls and
ENTER control.
Safety information
Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the
system and retain for future reference.
Do not attempt to service, repair or modify the Rear Seat Entertainment
DVD System. See your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment.
The front glass on the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down
screen may break when hit with a hard surface. If the glass
breaks, do not touch the liquid crystalline material. In case of contact
with skin, wash immediately with soap and water.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
39
Do not expose the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive
periods of time. Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal.
Be sure to review user manuals for video games and video game
equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Rear Seat
Entertainment DVD System.
Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords
and/or cables are broken, split or damaged. Carefully place cords and/or
cables where they will not be stepped on or interfere with the operation
of seats and/or compartments.
Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and/or cables
when not in use.
Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers. Do not blow on
them or allow them to get wet or dirty.
Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene, paint thinner or
any other solvent.
Federal Communication Commission (FCC) Compliance
Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could void
user’s authority to operate the equipment. This equipment has been tested
and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant
to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference with radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference
to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an
experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Care and service of the DVD player
Environmental extremes
DVD players that are subjected to harsh environmental conditions may
be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability. To avoid these
outcomes, whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to:
• extremely hot or cold temperatures.
• direct sunlight.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
40
• high humidity.
• a dusty environment.
• locations where strong magnetic fields are generated.
Temperature extremes
When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold
place for a long period of time, wait until the cabin temperature of the
vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system.
Humidity and moisture condensation
Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely
humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one. If
moisture condensation occurs, do not insert a CD or DVD into the
player. If one is already in the player, remove it. Turn the DVD player ON
to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD. This could take an hour or
more.
Cleaning the liquid crystal display (LCD) flip-down screen
Clean the display screen by applying a small amount of water or any
ammonia-based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth. Rub the
screen gently until the dust, dirt or fingerprints are removed. Do not
spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents. Overspray
from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the
screen and cause damage. Do not apply excessive pressure while
cleaning the screen.
Foreign substances
Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD
player compartment. If liquid is accidentally spilled onto the system,
immediately turn the system OFF and consult a qualified service
technician.
Cleaning CDs and DVDs
Inspect all discs for contamination before playing. If necessary, clean
discs only with an approved CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to
the edge. Do not use circular motion.
Cleaning the DVD player exterior
Clean the exterior of the DVD player with a damp cloth. Do not use CD
cleaning kits or CDs intended to clean the interior of your DVD player.
Use of these products may damage your system.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Entertainment Systems
41
HEATER ONLY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control:
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and the
floor vents.
O (OFF): Outside air is shut out and the fan will not operate.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents,
floor vents and demister vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents. Can be used to clear windshield of fog and thin ice.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle during cold or warm
weather, do not drive with the air flow selector in the OFF position.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the air
flow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
To aid in side window defogging/demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Modulate the temperature control to maintain comfort.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
Climate Controls
42
3. Set the fan speed to the highest setting.
4. Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
MANUAL HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
(IF EQUIPPED)
1. Fan speed adjustment: Controls the volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature selection: Controls the temperature of the airflow in
the vehicle.
3. Air flow selections: Controls the direction of the airflow in the
vehicle. See the following for a brief description on each control.
MAX A/C: Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel
vents and center console vents (if equipped) to cool the vehicle. This
re-cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient.
Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering
the vehicle. The temperature selection control will not adjust airflow
temperature when in MAX A/C mode.
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents and
center console vents (if equipped).
: Distributes outside air through the instrument panel vents, floor
vents and center console vents (if equipped).
OFF: Outside air is shut out and the climate system is turned off.
: Distributes outside air through the floor vents.
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents,
floor vents and demister vents.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
43
: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and
demister vents.
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF position.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2–3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
For maximum cooling performance (MAX A/C) in MAX A/C mode:
• Move the temperature control to the coolest setting.
• Set the fan to the highest speed initially, then adjust in order to
maintain comfort.
To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
44
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Press the AUTO and
(floor/defrost) controls at the same time and
hold for one second to switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
1. A/C: Press to activate/deactivate
air conditioning. Use with
recirculated air to improve cooling
performance and efficiency. Engages automatically in AUTO,
(defrost), and (floor/defrost).
2. Recirculated air: Press to
activate/deactivate air recirculation
in cabin. Recirculated air may
reduce the amount of time to cool down the interior of the vehicle and
may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the
vehicle. Recirculation can be engaged manually in any other airflow
selection except
(defrost). Recirculation may turn off automatically
in all airflow selections.
3. Defrost:
Distributes outside
air through the windshield defroster
vents and demister vents. Can be
used to clear windshield of fog and thin ice.
4. Fan speed: Press the respective
control in order to manually
increase or decrease the fan speed.
To return to automatic fan
operation, press AUTO.
5.
(Floor/defrost): Distributes air through the instrument panel
vents, floor vents and demister vents.
OFFAUTO
EXT TEMP
A/C
F
AUTO
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
45
6. (Floor): Distributes air through the floor vents.
7.
(Panel/floor): Distributes air through the instrument panel vents,
floor vents and center console vents (if equipped).
8.
(Panel): Distributes air through the instrument panel vents and
center console vents (if equipped).
9. OFF: Outside air is shut out and
the climate control system is turned
off.
10. Manual override controls:
The manual override controls allow
you to change the system operation.
To return to full automatic control, press AUTO. Refer to controls 5–8
for a brief description of each mode.
11. AUTO: Press to engage full
automatic operation, and select the
desired temperature using the
temperature control. The system will automatically determine fan speed,
airflow location, A/C on or off, and outside or recirculated air, to heat or
cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature.
12. EXT Control (if equipped):
Press EXT TEMP to display outside
temperature. Press again to display
cabin temperature settings.
13. Temperature controls: Press
to increase or decrease the
temperature in the vehicle cabin.
Note: The recommended vehicle
cabin setting is between 72°F (22°C) and 75°F (24°C).
Operating tips
• To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather, place
the air flow selector in the
position.
• To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle, do not drive with the
air flow selector in the OFF or with recirculated air engaged.
• Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the
airflow to the rear seats.
• Remove any snow, ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of
the windshield.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
46
• To improve the A/C cool down, drive with the windows slightly open
for 2–3 minutes after start up or until the vehicle has been “aired out.”
For maximum cooling performance in AUTO mode:
• Press AUTO control and set to desired temperature.
For maximum cooling performance using manual override modes:
• Press
(panel), A/C, with recirculated air. Set the temperature to
60°F (16°C) and the fan to the highest setting.
To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold weather:
1. Select
.
2. Select A/C.
3. Set the temperature control to maintain comfort.
4. Set the fan speed to highest setting.
5. Direct the outer instrument panel vents towards the side windows. To
increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
To increase airflow to the outer instrument panel vents, close the vents
located in the middle of the instrument panel.
Do not place objects on top of the instrument panel as these
objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden stop.
AUXILIARY SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
Your vehicle may be equipped with auxiliary controls. These allow the
front or rear seat passengers to control airflow direction, temperature
and fan level of the rear compartment to quickly heat or cool the entire
vehicle.
Front auxiliary controls:
1. Fan control: Controls the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle. Turn to REAR to give rear
seat passengers control of the
auxiliary system. When set to OFF
the auxiliary system is turned off.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
47
2. Temperature control: Controls the temperature of the airflow in the
vehicle. If the main climate control system is in Max A/C mode (for
manual controls) or in full cooling (for automatic controls) the auxiliary
temperature selection will not adjust airflow temperature.
3. Airflow control: FLOOR directs air to the floor of the third row
seating. PANEL directs air to the overhead registers of the second and
third row seating. To blend the airflow direction, select any position
between FLOOR and PANEL.
Rear auxiliary controls:
When the front auxiliary control is set to REAR, the control in the rear
seat overhead console must be used to make the desired adjustments. If
the front auxiliary control is not set to REAR, the rear seat control will
not operate.
1. Fan control: Controls the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
2. Temperature control: Controls
the temperature of the airflow in the
vehicle. If the main climate control
system is in Max A/C mode for
manual controls or in full cooling for automatic controls, the auxiliary
temperature selection will not adjust airflow temperature.
3. Airflow control: FLOOR directs air to the floor of the third row
seating. PANEL directs air to the overhead registers of the second and
third row seating. To blend the airflow direction, select any position
between FLOOR and PANEL.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
The rear window defroster control is
located on the instrument panel and
works to clear the rear window of
fog and thin ice.
Ensure the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position. Press to activate/deactivate
rear window defrost.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside
of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the
rear window. This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and
will not be covered by your warranty.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Climate Controls
48
HEADLAMP CONTROL
Turns the lamps off.
Turns on the parking lamps,
instrument panel lamps, license
plate lamps and tail lamps.
Turns the headlamps on.
Autolamp control (if equipped)
The autolamp system provides light
sensitive automatic on-off control of
the exterior lights normally
controlled by the headlamp control.
The autolamp system also keeps the
lights on for approximately 20
seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to OFF.
To change the delay time of the autolamp feature, do the following:
1. Start with the ignition in OFF and the autolamps selected.
2. Deselect the autolamps.
3. Put the ignition in RUN.
4. Put the ignition in OFF.
5. Select the autolamps. Steps 2 through 5 must be performed within a
10 second period. At this point, the headlamps and parking lamps will
turn on.
6. Deselect the autolamps after the desired autolamp delay time
(maximum of 3 minutes). At this point, the headlamps and parking
lamps will turn off.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
Lights
49
Foglamp control (if equipped)
The headlamp control also operates
the foglamps. The foglamps can be
turned on only when the headlamp
control is in the
, or
position and the high beams are not
turned on.
In autolamp mode, the foglamps
won’t be operational until lighting
conditions warrant the activation of the headlamp/parklamp lighting.
Pull headlamp control towards you to turn foglamps on. The foglamp
indicator light
will illuminate when the switch is pulled and the
parklamps are on.
Daytime running lamps (DRL) (if equipped)
Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output.
To activate:
• the ignition must be in the ON position,
• the headlamp control is in the OFF or parking lamp position and
• the parking brake must be disengaged.
Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during
inclement weather. The Daytime Running Lamp (DRL) system
does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide
adequate lighting during these conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision.
High beams
Push the lever toward the
instrument panel to activate. Pull
the lever towards you to deactivate.
A
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
50
Flash to pass
Pull toward you slightly to activate
and release to deactivate.
PANEL DIMMER CONTROL
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable
switches in the vehicle during
headlamp and parklamp operation.
Move the control to the full upright
position, past detent, to turn on the
interior lamps.
HEADLAMP AIM ADJUSTMENT
The headlamps on your vehicle can only be vertically adjusted. Your
vehicle does not require horizontal aim adjustments.
To adjust the headlamps:
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
• (1) Eight feet
• (2) Center height of lamp to ground
• (3) Twenty-five feet
• (4) Horizontal reference line
2. Measure the height from the
center of your headlamp (indicated
by a 3.0 mm circle on the bulb
shield inside the lamp) to the
ground and mark an 8 foot (2.4
meter) horizontal reference line on
the vertical wall or screen at this
height (a piece of masking tape
works well).
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
51
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and
open the hood. Cover one of the headlamps so no light hits the wall.
4. On the wall or screen you will
observe a light pattern with a
distinct horizontal edge towards the
right. If this edge is not at the
horizontal reference line, the beam will need to be adjusted so the edge
is at the same height as the horizontal reference line.
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on
each headlamp, then usea4mm
socket/wrench to turn the adjuster
either counterclockwise (to adjust
down) or clockwise (to adjust up)
aligning the upper edge of the light
pattern up to the horizontal line.
6. Repeat step 3–5 for the other
headlamp.
7. Close the hood and turn off the
lamps.
TURN SIGNAL CONTROL
• Push down to activate the left
turn signal.
• Push up to activate the right turn
signal.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
52
INTERIOR LAMPS
Dome/Map lamps (if equipped)
The map lamps and controls are
located on the dome lamp. Press the
controls on either side of each map
lamp to activate the lamps.
Rear courtesy/reading lamps
• Second row courtesy/reading lamp
• Third row courtesy/reading lamp
The courtesy lamps light when:
• any door is opened.
• the instrument panel dimmer switch is pushed past the detent.
• any of the remote entry controls are pressed and the ignition is OFF.
The reading lamps can be turned on by pressing the rocker control.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
53
Rear dome lamp
The dome lamp lights when:
• any door is opened (and switch is
in middle position).
• the instrument panel dimmer
switch is held up until the
courtesy lamps come on.
• any of the remote entry controls
are pressed and the ignition is OFF (and switch is in the middle
position).
With the ignition key in the ACC or ON position, the rear dome lamp can
be turned ON or OFF by sliding the control.
BULBS
Replacing exterior bulbs
Check the operation of all the bulbs frequently.
Using the right bulbs
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. Headlamp bulbs
must be marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America and an
“E” for Europe to assure lamp performance, light brightness and pattern
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn
time.
Function Number of
bulbs
Trade number
Headlamps 2 9008
Park/turn lamp 2 3157 AK
Sidemarker lamp 2 194
Foglamp 2 9145
Tail/stop lamp 2 3457K
Backup lamp 2 3156K
High-mount brakelamp 3 912
Rear dome lamp 1 921
Map/dome lamp 2 578
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
54
Function Number of
bulbs
Trade number
Second row reading lamp 2 578
Third row reading lamp 2 211-2
License lamp 2 194
All replacement bulbs are clear in color except where noted.
To replace all instrument panel lights - see your dealer
Interior bulbs
Check the operation of all bulbs frequently.
Replacing headlamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open
the hood.
2. Remove the four screws from the
top and bottom front of the
headlamp assembly.
3. Press the retaining clip at the top
of the headlamp assembly while
pulling the assembly straight out.
If removing the lamp is difficult,
removing the four screws along
the top of the grill will help
provide more clearance.
4. Disconnect the electrical
connector by squeezing the release
tab and pushing the connector
forward and then pulling it reward.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
55
5. Remove the bulb assembly by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully and keep out of
children’s reach. Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to
break the next time the headlamps are operated.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing park/turn and sidemarker lamp bulbs
1. Make sure that the headlamp control is in the OFF position and open
the hood.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
56
2. Remove the four screws from the
top and bottom front of the
headlamp assembly.
3. Press the retaining clip at the top
of the headlamp assembly while
pulling the assembly straight out.
If removing the lamp is difficult,
removing the four screws along
the top of the grill will help
provide more clearance.
4. Remove the bulb assembly, (1)
sidemarker or (2) park/turn, by
turning it counterclockwise and
pulling it straight out.
5. Pull the old bulb out from the
socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
57
Replacing foglamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and then rotate
the foglamp bulb counterclockwise
and remove from foglamp (the rear
side of the foglamp is shown).
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the foglamp bulb.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
Replacing tail lamp/turn/backup lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and remove the
four screws and the lamp assembly
from vehicle.
2. Rotate bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove from
lamp assembly.
3. Carefully pull the bulb straight
out of the socket.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
58
Replacing high-mount brakelamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and remove the
two screws and then the lamp
assembly.
2. Remove the bulb socket from
lamp assembly and pull the bulb
straight out.
Install the new bulb(s) in reverse order.
Replacing license plate lamp bulbs
1. Make sure the headlamp switch is
in the OFF position and reach
behind the rear bumper to locate
the bulb socket.
2. Twist the socket counterclockwise
and remove.
3. Pull the old bulb straight out.
Install the new bulb in reverse order.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Lights
59
MULTI-FUNCTION LEVER
Windshield wiper: Rotate the end
of the control away from you to
increase the speed of the wipers;
rotate towards you to decrease the
speed of the wipers.
Speed dependent wipers: When
the wiper control is on, the speed of
the wipers will automatically adjust
with the vehicle speed. The faster your vehicle is travelling the faster the
wipers will go.
Windshield washer: Push the end
of the stalk:
• briefly: causes a single swipe of
the wipers without washer fluid.
• a quick push and hold: the wipers
will swipe three times with washer fluid.
• a long push and hold: the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for
up to ten seconds.
Rear window wiper/washer controls
For rear wiper operation, rotate the
rear window wiper and washer
control to the desired position.
Select:
INT 1 — 3.5 second interval rear
wiper.
INT 2 — 10.5 second interval rear
wiper.
OFF — Rear wiper and washer off.
For rear wash cycle, rotate (and hold as desired) the rear wiper/washer
control to either
position.
From either position, the control will automatically return to the INT2 or
OFF position.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
Driver Controls
60
Changing the wiper blades
1. Pull the wiper arm away from the
vehicle. Turn the blade at an angle
from the wiper arm. Push the lock
pin manually to release the blade
and pull the wiper blade down
toward the windshield to remove it
from the arm.
2. Attach the new wiper to the
wiper arm and press it into place
until a click is heard.
3. Replace wiper blades every 6 months for optimum performance.
4. Poor wiper quality can sometimes be improved by cleaning the wiper
blades, refer to Window and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter.
5. To prolong the life of the wiper blades, it is highly recommended to
scrape off the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers. The
layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the
wiper rubber element.
TILT STEERING WHEEL
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull and hold the steering wheel
release control toward you.
2. Move the steering wheel up or
down until you find the desired
location.
3. Release the steering wheel
release control. This will lock the
steering wheel in position.
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
61
TRANSMISSION CONTROL
Tow/Haul feature (5–speed automatic transmission) (if equipped)
To activate, press the transmission
control switch (TCS) located on the
gearshift. The TOW/HAUL indicator
light will illuminate on the gearshift
lever or in the instrument cluster,
depending on how your vehicle is
equipped. The transmission will operate in all gears. Press the
transmission control switch again to deactivate Tow/Haul mode. When
you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the transmission will automatically
return to normal mode with Tow/Haul feature deactivated, refer to the
Driving chapter for more information.
Overdrive cancel (4–speed automatic transmission) (if equipped)
To deactivate overdrive, press the
transmission control switch (TCS)
located on the gearshift. The OFF
indicator light will illuminate on the
gearshift. The transmission will
operate in all gears except
overdrive. Press the transmission control switch again to return to
normal overdrive mode. When you shut off and re-start your vehicle, the
transmission will automatically return to normal (Overdrive) mode.
For additional information about the gearshift and the transmission
control switch operation refer to the Driving chapter.
ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR
Lift the mirror cover to turn on the
visor mirror lamps.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The appearance of your vehicle’s overhead console will vary according to
your option package.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
62
Forward storage bin (if equipped)
Press the release control to open
the storage compartment. The door
will open slightly and can be moved
to full open.
The storage compartment may be
used to secure sunglasses or a
similar object.
Installing a garage door opener (if equipped)
The storage compartment can be converted to accommodate a variety of
aftermarket garage door openers:
• Place Velcro hook onto back side
of aftermarket transmitter
opposite of actuator control.
• Place transmitter into storage
compartment, control down.
• Place the provided height
adaptors onto the back of the
storage bin door as needed.
• Press the storage compartment door to activate the transmitter.
Power quarter rear windows (if equipped)
When closing the power
quarter rear windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and ensure that
children and/or pets are not in the
proximity of the window openings.
Press the
portion of the VENT
control to open the power rear quarter windows.
Press the
portion of the VENT control to close the power rear
quarter windows.
RESET
VENT
V
EN
T
MODE E/M
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
63
AUXILIARY POWER POINT (12VDC)
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do not hang
any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigarette lighter. Use
the power point.
Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element.
The Maximum power each power point can supply depends on the fuse
rating. For example: a 20A fuse should supply a maximum of 240 Watts,
a 15A fuse should supply a maximum of 180 Watts and a 10A fuse should
supply a maximum of 120 Watts. Exceeding these limits will result in a
blown fuse.
Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used.
There are up to four auxiliary power points in the following locations:
• Located on the instrument panel.
• Located on the back side of the
center console (Accessible from
the second row seats).
POWER POINT
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
64
• Located in the left side storage
compartment in the third row
seating position.
• Located on the right trim panel in
the rear cargo area.
POWER WINDOWS
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let
children play with the power windows. They may seriously injure
themselves.
When closing the power windows, you should verify they are free
of obstructions and ensure that children and/or pets are not in
the proximity of the window openings.
Press and hold the bottom part of
the rocker switch to open the
window. Press and hold the top part
of the rocker switch to close the
window.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
65
One touch down
Allows the driver’s window to open
fully without holding the control
down. Press completely down on
AUTO and release quickly. Press
again to stop.
Window lock
The window lock feature allows only
the driver to operate the power
windows.
To lock out all the window controls
except for the driver’s press the left
side of the control. Press the right
side to restore the window controls.
Accessory delay (if equipped)
With accessory delay, the window switches may be used for up to ten
minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position or until
any door is opened.
MIRRORS
Automatic dimming inside rear view mirror (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with an inside rear view mirror with an
auto-dimming function. The electronic day/night mirror will change from
the normal state to the non-glare state when bright lights (glare) reach
the mirror. When the mirror detects bright light from front or behind, it
will automatically adjust to minimize glare.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
66
Press the control located on the
bottom of the mirror to turn the
mirror on or off. The mirror will
automatically return to the normal
state whenever the vehicle is placed
in R (reverse)(when the mirror is
on) to ensure a bright clear view
when backing up.
Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel
or other petroleum-based cleaning
products.
Power side view mirrors (if equipped)
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select L to adjust the left mirror
or R to adjust the right mirror.
2. Move the control in the direction
you wish to tilt the mirror.
3. Return to the center position to
disable the adjust function.
Heated outside mirrors
(if equipped)
The main mirror glass is heated automatically to remove ice, mist and
fog and activates when the vehicle is started.
Note: The mirrors may be hot to the touch but will not burn. This is a
normal condition.
Type A
The mirror heating elements are
designed to operate regardless of
the geographic location of the
vehicle. There is no switch to turn
on, or other operator involvement
required other than to start the
vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
67
Type B
The spotter mirror, below the main
mirror, is not heated and must be
adjusted manually.
Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to
readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place. These actions
could cause damage to the glass and mirrors.
Mirror mounted side turn signal indicator (if equipped)
Type A
When the vehicle turn signals are
activated, the mirrors will show a
blinking red arrow.
The turn signal provides an
additional warning to other drivers
that your vehicle is about to turn.
Type B
When the vehicle turn signals are
activated, the outer portion of the
mirror housing will blink amber.
The turn signal feature can be seen
by other drivers who may approach
from the rear of the vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
68
Clearance lamps (if equipped)
Illuminates when the headlamps or
parking lamps are switched on.
This provides additional visibility of
your vehicle to other drivers on the
road.
Fold-away mirrors
The mirrors can be manually folded forward or backwards for narrow
spaces like driving through an automatic car wash or backing out of a
garage with the trailer tow mirror.
The telescoping feature (if equipped) allows the mirror to extend
approximately 3.15 inches (80 mm). This feature is especially useful to
the driver when towing a trailer.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
69
POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS
The accelerator and brake pedal
should only be adjusted when the
vehicle is stopped and the gearshift
lever is in the P (Park) position.
Press and hold the rocker control to
adjust accelerator and brake pedal
toward you or away from you.
The adjustment allows for approximately 3 inches (71–76 mm) of
maximum travel.
Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the
pedals while the vehicle is moving.
SPEED CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
With speed control set, you can maintain a speed of 30 mph (48 km/h)
or more without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal. Speed
control does not work at speeds below 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Setting speed control
The controls for using your speed
control are located on the steering
wheel for your convenience.
1. Press the ON control and release
it.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
ON
OFF
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
70
3. Press the SET ACCEL control
and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
5. The indicator
light on the
instrument cluster will turn on.
Note:
• Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a
steep hill.
• If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill, you
may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed.
• If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph (16 km/h) below
your set speed on an uphill, your speed control will disengage.
Resuming a set speed
Press the RES/RESUME control and
release it. This will automatically
return the vehicle to the previously
set speed. The RES/RESUME
control will not work if the vehicle
speed is not faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Increasing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to set a higher
speed:
• Press and hold the SET ACCEL
control until you get to the
desired speed, then release the
control. You can also use the SET
ACCEL control to operate the
Tap-Up function. Press and
release this control to increase the vehicle set speed in small amounts
by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed. When the
vehicle reaches that speed press and release the SET ACCEL control.
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
71
Reducing speed while using speed control
There are two ways to reduce a set
speed:
• Press and hold the COAST
control until you get to the
desired speed, then release the
control. You can also use the
COAST control to operate the
Tap-Down function. Press and
release this control to decrease the vehicle set speed in small amounts
by 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
• Depress the brake pedal until the
desired vehicle speed is reached,
press the SET ACCEL control.
Turning off speed control
There are two ways to turn off the speed control:
• Depress the brake pedal or the clutch pedal (if equipped). This will
not erase your vehicle’s previously set speed.
• Press the speed control OFF
control.
Note: When you turn off the speed
control or the ignition, your speed
control set speed memory is erased.
Indicator light
This light comes on when either the
SET ACCEL or RES controls are
pressed. The vehicle speed must be
at or above 48 km/h (30 mph). It
turns off when the speed control
OFF control is pressed, the brake is
applied, or the ignition is turned to the OFF position.
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
RES
SET
ACCEL
COAST
ON
OFF
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
72
STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS (IF EQUIPPED)
These controls allow you to operate some radio and climate control
features.
Radio control features
• Press MODE to select AM, FM1,
FM2, TAPE or CD (if equipped).
In Radio mode:
• Press NEXT to select a preset
station from memory.
In Tape mode:
• Press NEXT to listen to the next
selection on the tape.
In CD mode:
• Press NEXT to listen to the next
track on the disc.
In any mode:
• Press VOL up or down to adjust
the volume.
Climate control features
• Press TEMP up or down to adjust temperature.
• Press FAN up or down to adjust fan speed.
TRIP COMPUTER (IF EQUIPPED)
The trip computer tells you about the condition of your vehicle through
a constant monitor of vehicle systems. You may select display features on
the trip computer for a display of status.
The appearance of your vehicle’s trip computer may differ depending on
your vehicle’s option package, but the functions are the same.
The trip computer only operates with the ignition in the ON position.
Trip computer features are as follows:
NEXT
MODE
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
73
Selectable features
English/metric display
Press this control to change the trip
computer display between metric
and English units.
Mode control
Each press of the MODE control will
display a different feature as follows:
Average fuel economy. The
display will indicate the vehicle’s
average fuel economy in miles/gallon
or liters/100 km since the average
fuel economy was last reset.
If you calculate your average fuel
economy by dividing gallons of fuel
used by 100 miles traveled
(kilometers traveled by liters used), your figure may be different than
displayed for the following reasons:
• your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill-up
• differences in the automatic shut-off points on the fuel pumps at
service stations
• variations in top-off procedure from one fill-up to another
• rounding of the displayed values to the nearest gallon (liter)
To reset the average fuel economy:
1. Press the MODE control repeatedly until average fuel economy is
displayed (this is the only resettable display).
RESET
MODE
E/M
RESET
MODE
E/M
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
74
2. Press the E/M and MODE
controls simultaneously. The display
will illuminate the “AVG” indicator.
While the indicator is lit, release
both controls to reset the average
fuel economy.
Fuel range. This function estimates approximately how far you can
drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving
conditions. Remember to turn the ignition OFF when refueling to allow
this feature to correctly detect the added fuel.
The DTE function will flash for 5 seconds when you have approximately:
• 50 miles (80 km) left before you run out of fuel
• 25 miles (40 km )
• 10 miles (16 km)
DTE is calculated using a running average fuel economy, which is based
on your recent driving history of 500 miles (800 km). This value is not
the same as the average fuel economy display. The running average fuel
economy is reinitialized to a factory default value if the battery is
disconnected.
Outside air temperature (if equipped)
The temperature can be displayed in
Centigrade or Fahrenheit by
pressing the E/M control.
If the outside temperature falls
below 38°F(3°C), the display will
alternate from “ICE” to the outside
temperature at a two second rate
for one minute.
Off. In this mode the display is off.
Compass
The compass display is contained in the overhead console. The vehicle
heading is displayed as one of N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W and NW.
RESET
MODE
E/M
RESET
MODE
E/M
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
75
The compass heading is displayed in average fuel economy modes, fuel
range modes and temperature modes.
The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large
buildings, bridges, power lines and powerful broadcast antenna. Magnetic
or metallic objects placed in or on the vehicle may also affect compass
accuracy. Adjustments may need to be made to the zone and calibration
of the compass.
Compass zone adjustment
1. Determine which magnetic zone
you are in for your geographic
location by referring to the zone
map.
2. Locate the trip computer on the
overhead console.
3. Turn ignition to the ON position.
4. Press and hold both trip
computer controls. After
approximately four seconds, the trip
computer will enter zone setting
mode. Zone setting mode is
indicated when the display lights the
“ZONE” indicator.
5. Release both controls.
Subsequent pressing of either
control will increment the zone.
Press the control repeatedly until
the correct zone setting for your geographic location is displayed on the
trip computer.
6. To exit the zone setting mode and save the displayed zone in memory,
release both controls for greater than five seconds.
Compass calibration adjustment
Perform this adjustment in an open area free from steel structures and
high voltage lines.
For optimum calibration, turn off all electrical accessories (heater/air
conditioning, wipers, etc.) and make sure all vehicle doors are shut.
123
4
5
6 7 8 9 1011
12
13
14
15
RESET
MODE
E/M
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
76
1. Locate the trip computer located in the overhead console.
2. Start the vehicle.
3. Press and hold both trip
computer controls. After
approximately eight seconds, the
trip computer will enter CAL mode.
CAL mode is indicated when the
display lights the “CAL” indicator.
4. Release both controls. The display
will return to normal, except that
the CAL indicator will remain lit
until the compass is successfully
calibrated.
5. Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle (less than 3 mph [5 km/h]) until
the CAL indicator turns off. It may take up to five circles to complete
calibration.
6. The compass is now calibrated.
HOMELINK姞 WIRELESS CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The HomeLink威 Wireless Control System, located on the driver’s visor,
provides a convenient way to replace up to three hand-held transmitters
with a single built-in device. This feature will learn the radio frequency
codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors, entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks, and home or office lighting.
When programming your HomeLink威 Wireless Control System to
a garage door or gate, be sure that people and objects are out of
the way to prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use the HomeLink威 Wireless Control System with any garage
door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door which cannot
detect an object, signaling the door to stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards. For more information, contact
HomeLink威 at: www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Retain the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for
future programming procedures (i.e. new HomeLink威 equipped vehicle
purchase). It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle, the
programmed Homelink威 buttons be erased for security purposes, refer to
Programming in this section.
RESET
MODE
E/M
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
77
Programming
Do not program HomeLink威 with the vehicle parked in the garage.
Note: Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the
ACC position for programming and/or operation of the HomeLink威.Itis
also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink威 for quicker
training and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
1. Press and hold the two outside
buttons releasing only when the
indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Do not repeat step one
to program additional hand-held
transmitters to the remaining two
HomeLink威 buttons. This will erase
previously programmed hand-held
transmitter signals into HomeLink威.
2. Position the end of your
hand-held transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 cm) away from the HomeLink威
button you wish to program (located on your visor) while keeping the
indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink威 and hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release
the buttons until step 4 has been
completed.
Some entry gates and garage door
openers may require you to replace
step 3 with procedures noted in the
“Gate Operator and Canadian Programming” in this section for Canadian
residents.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. Release both
buttons when the indicator light flashes rapidly. (The rapid flashing light
indicates acceptance of the hand-held transmitters’ radio frequency
signals.)
5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button and observe the
indicator light. If the light is constant, programming is complete and your
device should activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed and
released. Note: To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
begin with step 2 in the “Programming” section — do not repeat step 1.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
78
Note: If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns
to a continuous red, proceed with steps 6 through 8 to complete
programming of a rolling code equipped device.
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the “learn” or “smart” button (usually near where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the unit).
7. Press and release the “learn” or “smart” button. (The name and color
of the button may vary by manufacturer.)
Note: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate step eight.
8. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the HomeLink威 button. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence
again, and, depending on the brand of the garage door opener (or other
rolling code equipped device), repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming.
HomeLink威 should now activate your rolling code equipped device. To
program additional HomeLink威 buttons begin with step 2 in the
“Programming” section. For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1–800–355–3515.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your
hand-held transmitter may
automatically stop transmitting —
not allowing enough time for
HomeLink威 to accept the signal
from the hand-held transmitter.
After completing steps 1 and 2
outlined in the “Programming”
section, replace step 3 with the following:
Note: If programming a garage door opener or gate operator, it is
advised to unplug the device during the “cycling” process to prevent
overheating.
• Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button (note step 3 in the
“Programming” section) while you press and release — every two
seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has been accepted by the HomeLink威. The indicator light will
flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink威 accepts the radio
frequency signal.
• Proceed with step 4 in the “Programming” section.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
79
Operating the HomeLink姞 Wireless Control System
To operate, simply press and release
the appropriate HomeLink威 button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained product (garage door, gate
operator, security system, entry
door lock, or home or office lighting
etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time. In the event that there are still
programming difficulties, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com or
1–800–355–3515.
Erasing HomeLink姞 buttons
To erase the three programmed
buttons (individual buttons cannot
be erased):
• Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink威 buttons until the
indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds. Release
both buttons. Do not hold for
longer that 30 seconds.
HomeLink威 is now in the train (or
learning) mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with step
2inthe“Programming” section.
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞 button
To program a device to HomeLink威 using a HomeLink威 button previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button. Do NOT release the
button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without
releasing the HomeLink威 button, follow step 2 in the “Programming”
section.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink威 at www.homelink.com
or 1–800–355–3515.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
80
CENTER CONSOLE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features. These
include:
• Utility compartment
• Coin holder slots
• Pen holder
Use only soft cups in the
cupholder. Hard objects can
injure you in a collision.
• Utility compartment
• Pen holder
• Space for lap-top computer
CELL PHONE USE
The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly
important in the conduct of business and personal affairs. However,
drivers must not compromise their own or others’ safety when using
such equipment. Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety
and security when appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications
equipment to avoid negating these benefits.
Mobile Communication Equipment includes, but is not limited to cellular
phones, pagers, portable email devices, in vehicle communications
systems, telematics devices and portable two-way radios.
A driver’s first responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle.
The most important thing you can do to prevent a crash is to
avoid distractions and pay attention to the road. Wait until it is safe to
operate Mobile Communications Equipment.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
81
CARGO NET (IF EQUIPPED)
The cargo net secures lightweight
objects in the cargo area. Attach the
net to the anchors provided.
This net is not designed to
restrain objects during a
collision.
TRIDOOR
The TriDoor area is intended for cargo storage only, not for passengers.
You can open and close the TriDoors from outside the vehicle only. You
cannot open the liftgate or cargo doors from inside the vehicle.
• To open the liftgate, unlock the
liftgate (with the key, the remote
entry transmitter by pressing the
UNLOCK button twice or power
door locks) and pull up on the
liftgate handle.
• To open the cargo doors, open
the liftgate, then open right cargo
door first, using the handle on
top of the door, then open the
left cargo door using the handle
on the side of the door.
For wider loads, the cargo doors can be opened wider by unhooking the
check straps from the door hinge. Make sure the check straps are
reattached after loading and before closing the cargo doors.
• To close and lock the liftgate and cargo doors, close the left cargo
door first, then the right cargo door, then pull down and close the
liftgate. Lock the TriDoor with the key, remote entry transmitter or
the power door lock button.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
82
The cargo doors and liftgate should be closed before driving your
vehicle. Make sure the liftgate and/or the cargo doors are closed
to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle. Leaving
the liftgate and/or the cargo doors open could cause serious damage to
the TriDoors and its components. If you must drive with the cargo
doors and liftgate window open, keep the vents open so outside air
comes into the vehicle.
LUGGAGE RACK
Maximum load is 200 lb (90 kg) on the roof rack structure, or 100 lbs (45
kg) on the roof panel rails. Distribute the load equally on the cross bars.
To adjust the cross-bar position:
1. Release the latch at both ends of
the cross-bar (both cross-bars are
adjustable).
2. Slide cross-bar to the desired
location.
3. Tighten the latch at both ends of
the cross-bar.
To remove the cross-bar assembly
from the roof rack side rails:
1. Loosen the latch at both ends of
the cross-bar (both cross-bars are
adjustable).
2. Slide cross-bar to the end of the
rail.
3. Press down on the locking feature
inside the side rail and slide the cross-bar over it.
4. Slide the assemblies off the end.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more than
low-slung sport cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt maneuvers in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in an increase risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driver Controls
83
KEYS
The key operates all locks on your vehicle. In case of loss, replacement
keys are available from your dealer.
You should always carry a second key with you in a safe place in case
you require it in an emergency.
Refer to SecuriLock娂 Passive Anti-Theft System for more information.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
Press control to unlock all doors.
Press control to lock all doors.
Smart locks (if equipped)
This feature prevents you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your
key is still in the ignition.
When you open the driver’s door and you lock the vehicle with the
power door locks, all the doors will lock, then the driver’s door will
automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition.
The vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition, using the
manual lock button on the door, locking the driver’s door with a key, by
simultaneously pressing the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 controls on the remote
keyless entry keypad (if equipped), or using the lock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter (if equipped).
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
Locks and Security
84
Childproof door locks
• When these locks are set, the
rear doors cannot be opened from
the inside.
• The rear doors can be opened
from the outside when the doors
are unlocked.
The childproof locks are located on
rear edge of each rear door and
must be set separately for each
door. Setting the lock for one door
will not automatically set the lock
for both doors.
• Move lock control up to engage
the childproof lock.
• Move control down to disengage
childproof locks.
REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
The typical operating range for your remote entry transmitter is
approximately 33 feet (10 meters). A decrease in operating range could
be caused by:
• weather conditions,
• nearby radio towers,
• structures around the vehicle, or
• other vehicles parked next to your vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
85
Your vehicle is equipped with a remote entry system which allows you to:
• unlock the vehicle doors without
a key.
• lock all the vehicle doors without
a key.
• activate the personal alarm.
If there is any potential remote keyless entry problem with your vehicle,
ensure ALL remote entry transmitters are taken to the dealership, to
aid in troubleshooting.
Unlocking the doors
1. Press and release to unlock the driver’s door. Note: The interior
lamps and running board lamps (if equipped) will illuminate.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to unlock all doors
and the liftgate.
Locking the doors
1. Press and release to lock all the doors and liftgate. The parking
lamps will flash once if all doors, the liftgate and the hood are closed and
locked.
2. Press
and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the
doors and liftgate are closed and locked. Note: The doors will lock again,
the horn will chirp once, and the parking lamps will flash once more.
If any of the doors, the liftgate or the hood are not properly closed, the
horn will make two quick chirps.
Power door lock disable feature (if equipped)
The UNLOCK
feature on your power door locks will not work from
inside the vehicle when:
• the ignition has been turned to the 3 (OFF) position, and
• 20 seconds elapse after all vehicle doors are closed and locked using
the remote entry transmitter, or the power door lock control (while
the accompanying door is open).
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
86
The UNLOCK feature will work again after:
• a door has become ajar,
• the ignition is turned to the 4 (ON) position,
• unlocking the vehicle using the keyless entry keypad,
• or using the UNLOCK
control on your remote entry transmitter (if
equipped).
This feature is initially deactivated, but may be activated by taking your
vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer.
Sounding a panic alarm
Press
to activate the alarm. Press again or turn the ignition to 4
(ON) to deactivate.
Note: The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the 2
(LOCK) or 3 (OFF) position.
Replacing the battery
The remote entry transmitter uses one coin type three-volt lithium
battery CR2032 or equivalent.
To replace the battery:
1. Twist a thin coin between the two
halves of the remote entry
transmitter near the key ring. DO
NOT TAKE THE RUBBER COVER
AND CIRCUIT BOARD OFF THE
FRONT HOUSING OF THE
REMOTE ENTRY TRANSMITTER.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
87
2. Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals on the back
surface of the circuit board.
3. Remove the old battery. Note: Please refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
4. Insert the new battery. Refer to the diagram inside the remote entry
transmitter for the correct orientation of the battery. Press the battery
down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing
cavity.
5. Snap the two halves back together.
Note: Replacement of the battery will not cause the remote transmitter
to become deprogrammed from your vehicle. The remote transmitter
should operate normally after battery replacement.
Replacing lost remote entry transmitters
If you would like to have your remote entry transmitter reprogrammed
because you lost one, or would like to buy additional remote entry
transmitters, you can either reprogram them yourself, or take all
remote entry transmitters to your authorized dealer for
reprogramming.
How to reprogram your remote entry transmitters
You must have all remote entry transmitters (maximum of four)
available before beginning this procedure.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
88
To reprogram the remote entry
transmitters:
1. Ensure the vehicle is
electronically unlocked.
2. Put the key in the ignition.
3. Turn the key from the 2 (LOCK)
position to 3 (OFF).
4. Cycle eight times rapidly (within
10 seconds) between the 3 (OFF)
position and 4 (ON). Note: The
eighth turn must end in the 4 (ON) position.
5. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been activated.
6. Within 20 seconds press any button on the remote entry transmitter.
Note: If more than 20 seconds have passed you will need to start the
procedure over again.
7. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that this remote entry
transmitter has been programmed.
8. Repeat Step 6 to program each additional remote entry transmitter.
9. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position after you have finished
programming all of the remote entry transmitters. Note: After 20
seconds, you will automatically exit the programming mode.
10. The doors will lock, then unlock, to confirm that the programming
mode has been exited.
Illuminated entry
The interior lamps illuminate when the remote entry system is used to
unlock the door(s) or liftgate.
The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if:
• the ignition switch is turned to the 4 (ON) position, or
• the remote transmitter lock control is pressed, or
• the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 controls on the keyless entry keypad are
pressed, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The dome lamp control must not be set to the off position for the
illuminated entry system to operate.
3
2
1
5
4
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
89
The inside lights will not turn off if:
• they have been turned on with the dimmer control, or
• any door or the liftgate is open.
The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 30 minutes after the
ignition has been turned to the 3 (OFF) position, 10 minutes after if the
dome lamp is off, and 30 minutes after if the dome lamp switch is left
on.
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
You can use the keyless entry
keypad to lock or unlock the doors
without using a key.
The keypad can be operated with
the factory set 5–digit entry code;
this code is located on the owner’s wallet card in the glove box, is
marked on the computer module, and is available from your authorized
dealer. You can also create your own 5–digit personal entry code.
When pressing the controls on the keypad, press the middle of the
controls to ensure a good activation.
Programming a personal entry code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory set code.
2. Within five seconds press the 1 • 2 on the keypad.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. Each number must be entered
within five seconds of each other.
4. The doors will again lock then unlock to confirm that your personal
keycode has been programmed to the module.
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential order.
• The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal
code.
• If you set a second personal code it will erase your first personal code.
Erasing personal code
1. Enter the factory set 5–digit code.
2. Within five seconds, press the 1 • 2 on the keypad and release.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
90
3. Press and hold the 1 • 2 for two seconds. This must be done within
five seconds of completing Step 2.
Your personal code is now erased and only the factory set 5–digit code
will work.
Anti-scan feature
If an incorrect code has been entered 7 times (35 consecutive button
presses), the keypad will go into an anti-scan mode. This mode disables
the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash during this
time.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity.
• pressing the
control on the remote entry transmitter.
• the ignition is turned to the 4 (ON) position.
Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry
To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory set 5-digit code or your
personal code. Each number must be pressed within five seconds of each
other. The interior lamps will illuminate after entering a valid keypad
entry code.
To unlock all doors, press the 3 • 4 control within five seconds.
To lock all doors, press the 7 • 8 and the 9 • 0 at the same time. You
do not need to enter the keypad code first. Note: The interior lamps
will turn off.
Autolock (if equipped)
This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the following
conditions are met:
• the ignition key is in the 4 (ON) position,
• all the doors are closed,
• the brake is pressed before reaching 5 mph (8 km/h), and
• the vehicle is traveling more than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Relock
The autolock feature repeats when the following conditions are met:
• the vehicle’s speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h),
• any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the 4 (ON)
position,
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
91
• the brake is pressed before reaching 5 mph (8 km/h), and
• the vehicle is traveling more than 5 mph (8 km/h).
To deactivate/reactivate the autolock feature using the keypad
Your vehicle comes with the autolock feature activated. To
deactivate/reactivate this feature:
1. Ensure that the anti-theft system is not armed.
2. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position.
3. Close all the doors, liftgate and cargo doors.
4. Enter the 5-digit entry code.
5. Press and hold the 7 • 8. While holding the 7 • 8, press and release
the 3 • 4.
6. Release the 7 • 8.
The horn will chirp once when the system has been successfully
deactivated.
The horn will chirp twice (one short and one long chirp) when the
system has been successfully reactivated.
To deactivate/reactivate the autolock feature using the power door
unlock control
You must complete Steps 1-7 within 30 seconds or the procedure will
have to be repeated. If the procedure needs to be repeated, you must
wait 30 seconds.
1. Insert the key and turn the ignition to the 4 (ON) position.
2. Press the power door unlock control three times.
3. Turn the ignition from the 4 (ON) position to the 3 (OFF) position.
4. Press the power door unlock control three times.
5. Turn the ignition back to the 4 (ON) position. The horn will chirp.
6. Press the unlock control, then press the lock control. The horn will
chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice (one short and one long
chirp) if autolock was activated. Note: Pressing the power door
UNLOCK/LOCK button again will toggle between activating and
deactivating the autolock feature.
7. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position. The horn will chirp once to
confirm the procedure is complete.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
92
SECURILOCK姟 PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is an engine immobilization
system. This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being
started unless a coded key programmed to your vehicle is used. The
use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a “no-start” condition.
Your vehicle comes with two coded keys; additional coded keys may be
purchased from your dealer. The dealer can program your spare keys to
your vehicle or you can program the keys yourself. Refer to
Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded
key.
Note: The SecuriLock娂 passive anti-theft system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection.
Note: Large metallic objects, electronic devices that are used to
purchase gasoline or similar items, or a second coded key on the same
key chain may cause vehicle starting issues. You need to prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while starting the engine. These
objects will not cause damage to the coded key, but may cause a
momentary issue if they are too close to the key when starting the
engine. If a problem occurs, turn the ignition off, remove all objects on
the key chain away from the coded key and restart the engine.
Theft indicator
The theft indicator is located in the instrument cluster.
• When the ignition is in the 2 (LOCK) position, the indicator will flash
once every 2 seconds to indicate the SecuriLock娂 system is
functioning as a theft deterrent.
• When the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position, the indicator will glow for
3 seconds, then turn off to indicate normal system functionality.
If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock娂 system, the indicator will flash
rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the 4 (ON) position. If
this occurs, the vehicle should be taken to an authorized dealer for
service.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
93
Automatic arming
The vehicle is armed immediately
after switching the ignition to the 3
(OFF) position.
The
THEFT
indicator will flash
every two seconds when the vehicle
is armed.
Automatic disarming
Switching the ignition to the 4 (ON) position with a coded key disarms
the vehicle.
•
The
THEFT
indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out.
• If the
THEFT
indicator stays on for an extended period of time or
flashes rapidly, have the system serviced by your dealer.
Replacement keys
If your keys are lost or stolen and you don’t have an extra coded key,
you will need to have your vehicle towed to a dealership. The key codes
need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be
programmed.
Replacing coded keys can be very costly. Store an extra programmed key
away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any
inconveniences. Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional
spare or replacement keys.
Programming spare keys
You can program your own coded keys to your vehicle. Please read and
understand the entire procedure before you begin.
Tips:
• A maximum of eight keys can be coded to your vehicle.
• Only use Securilock娂 keys.
• You must have two previously programmed coded keys (keys that
already operate your vehicle’s engine) and the new unprogrammed
key(s) readily accessible.
• If two previously programmed coded keys are not available, you must
take your vehicle to your dealer to have the spare key(s)
programmed.
3
2
1
5
4
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
94
1. Insert a previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
2. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second, but no
more than 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position.
4. Remove the previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
5. Within ten seconds of removing the previously programmed coded key,
insert the other previously programmed coded key into the ignition.
6. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second but not
more than 10 seconds.
7. Turn the ignition to the 3 (OFF) position.
8. Remove the previously programmed coded key from the ignition.
9. Within twenty seconds of removing the previously programmed coded
key, insert the unprogrammed key (new/valet key) into the ignition.
10. Turn the ignition from the 3 (OFF) position to the 4 (ON) position.
Keep the ignition in the 4 (ON) position for at least one second, but no
more than 10 seconds.
11. Your new, unprogrammed key is now programmed.
If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle’s
engine and the theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and
then go out.
If the key was not successfully programmed, it will not start your
vehicle’s engine and the theft indicator light will flash on and off, or stay
on for more than three seconds. If failure repeats, bring your vehicle to
your dealer to have the new key(s) programmed.
To program additional new unprogrammed key(s), repeat this procedure
from Step 1 for each additional key.
3
2
1
5
4
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Locks and Security
95
SEATING
Notes:
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of
injury in a collision or sudden stop.
40/20/40 seat (if equipped)
• Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or backward.
Ensure that the seat is relatched
into place.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
Seating and Safety Restraints
96
60/40 split bench seat (if equipped)
• Lift the release bar to move the
seat forward or backward. Ensure
the seat is relatched into place.
• Pull the seatback handle up to
recline the seat.
Captain’s chair (if equipped)
• Lift the track release bar to move
the seat forward or rearward.
Make sure that the seat is
relatched into place.
• Pull the seatback handle up to
recline the seat.
• Push down the lever (if
equipped) located at the bottom
of the seatback to quickly fold the
seatback forward.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
97
Memory seats and adjustable pedals (if equipped)
This system allows automatic
positioning of the driver seat and
adjustable pedals to two
programmable positions.
The memory seat control is located
on the driver door.
• To program position one, move
the driver seat to the desired
position using the seat controls.
Press the SET control. The SET
control indicator light will briefly illuminate. While the light is
illuminated, press control 1.
• To program position two, repeat the previous procedure using control
2.
A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park
or Neutral. A memory seat position may be programmed at any time.
Using the manual lumbar support
For more lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
front of vehicle.
For less lumbar support, turn the
lumbar support control toward the
rear of vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
98
Adjusting the front power seat (if equipped)
The control is located on the outboard side of the seat cushion.
Press to raise or lower the front
portion of the seat cushion.
Press to raise or lower the rear
portion of the seat cushion.
Press the control to move the seat
forward, backward, up or down.
Heated seats (if equipped)
To operate the heated seats, do the following:
• Push control to activate.
• Push again to deactivate.
The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
99
The system will not automatically shutoff unless control is pushed to
deactivate. If system is not manually terminated at last use, then system
will remain active at next ignition key cycle.
40/20/40 front seat armrest and console (if equipped)
To release the armrest, pull forward
on the strap and pull the armrest
down.
To gain access to the storage
compartment in your armrest, lift
the latch to open the lid. The lid
cannot be opened in the upright
position.
Lift up armrest to return it to a
center seatback.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
100
REAR SEATS
Head restraints
To properly adjust your head restraints, lift the head restraint so that it
is located directly behind your head or as close to that position as
possible.
Push or pull the head restraint to
the desired position.
Rear folding seats (if equipped)
Folding down rear seats into load floor
Ensure that no objects such as books, purses or briefcases are on the
floor in front of the second row seats before folding them down and
insure the seat is fully latched rearward.
For assistance, refer to the label located on the seat side shield.
1. Lift strap to release seat cushion.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
101
2. Lift seat cushion up and rotate
forward.
3. The headrest must be removed in
order to fold the seatback down.
Remove 2nd row seat headrest by
pushing in both tabs while pulling
up on headrest simultaneously.
4. Stow headrest into the green caps
found on the top of the seat
cushion.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
102
5. Lift the lower seat control and
flip the seatback down.
6. For bench seats only, lift up flap
on seatback to release closeout
panel.
7. For bench seats only, rotate panel
to closeout the space between the
seatback and the floor.
Returning the seat to upright
Ensure the seat is pulled back to the locked position, whether
the seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
1. For bench seats, rotate the closeout panel onto the seatback and
secure with the retaining flap.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
103
2. Lift the lower seat control.
3. Pull up on the seatback while
lifting the handle to lift the seatback
into the upright position.
Note: The front seat may need to be moved forward to ease operation.
4. Remove headrest from storage position and return to 2nd row
seatback. Push down headrest completely to secure.
Reclining the second row seatback
Locate the release handle located on
the outboard side of the seat
cushion and lift gently to allow the
seatback to be adjusted to the
desired location.
Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat’s safety belt, resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a collision.
Third row seat (if equipped)
The third row seat is equipped with combination lap and shoulder belts
in the outboard seating positions and a manual adjust tongue lap belt in
the center seating position. For information on the proper operation of
the safety restraints, refer to Safety restraints in this chapter.
The third row seat may be removed from the vehicle for additional cargo
space.
Accessing the third row seat
Your vehicle is equipped with an easy entry second row seat feature
which allows ready access to the third row seat. You may enter the third
row seat through either rear side door.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
104
To reduce the risk of personal injury, the second row seat should
not be left in the forward, E-Z entry position while the vehicle is
in motion. Please ensure that the seat is in the upright, fully latched
rearward position before putting the vehicle in motion. Refer to the
warning label on the seat side shield.
1. Rotate the upper seat lever
rearward while pushing the seatback
toward the front of the vehicle.
2. Push the seatback toward the
front of the vehicle. This releases
the seat track and the seat will
move forward.
3. After entering the 3rd row seat,
pull back the 2nd row seatback until
it latches at full rearward position.
This will latch and lock the seatback and the seat track.
Insure the seat is pulled back to the locked position, whether the
seat is occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause
injury during a sudden stop.
Folding down the third row seat
Pull the seat release lever located
on the lower right side of the
seatback while pushing the seatback
down into the seat cushion. The
seatback will latch into place.
Pull the seat release lever to return
the seatback into the upright seating
position.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
105
Removing the third row seat
From the rear of the vehicle, with the liftgate window and cargo doors
open:
1. Pull the seat release lever located
on the lower right side of the
seatback while pushing the seatback
down onto the seat cushion.
• The seatback will latch onto the
cushion.
2. Lift the seat release bar located
at the center of the seat near the
floor to release the floor latches.
3. While pulling up on the release
bar, lift the seat up and out of the floor tubs and roll seat rearward.
4. With assistance, lift the seat out of the vehicle.
Installing the third row seat
Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor, whether the seat is
occupied or empty. If not latched, the seat may cause injury
during a sudden stop.
When reinstalling a rear seat in your vehicle it must be placed in
its original position. Improper installation of the seat will prevent
correct use of the safety belts and could increase the risk of injury.
Refer to the warning label on the seat belt.
For proper latching, ensure that the
floor tubs are clear of debris.
From the rear of the vehicle, with
the liftgate open:
1. With assistance, lift the seat into
the rear of the vehicle. Roll the seat
forward and guide the front locators
over the seat locator pins of the front floor tubs.
• When the rear of the seat is 4–5in(10–13 cm) above the rear pins,
let the seat drop. This will ensure that the seat will properly latch into
the floor.
2. Push up on the seat to verify that it is latched into the floor.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
106
3. Verify that the safety belts can move freely on either side of the seat.
4. Lift the lever and pull up the seatback to drive position.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Safety restraints precautions
Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure children sit in the back
seat where they can be properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas
are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a
safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt
assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that
are designed to be used as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm. 2)
Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one person.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
107
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a vehicle that has been
closed up in sunny weather; they could burn a small child. Check
seat covers and buckles before you place a child anywhere near them.
Combination lap and shoulder belts
1. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
2. To unfasten, push the release
button and remove the tongue from
the buckle.
The front outboard and rear outboard safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The front outboard passenger and
rear seat outboard safety belts have two types of locking modes
described below:
Vehicle sensitive mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle
movement. For example, if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
108
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety belts will lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and passengers.
Automatic locking mode
When to use the automatic locking mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The belt will
still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt.
This mode should be used any time a child safety seat is installed in a
passenger front or outboard rear seating position (if equipped). Children
12 years old and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible. Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety
seats for children later in this chapter.
How to use the automatic locking mode
• Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
• Grasp the shoulder portion and
pull downward until the entire
belt is pulled out.
• Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking
mode.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
109
How to disengage the automatic locking mode
Disconnect the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
After any vehicle collision, the safety belt systems at all outboard
seating positions (except the driver position, which doesn’t have
this feature) must be checked by a qualified technician to verify that
the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all seat belts should be checked for
proper function.
BELT AND RETRACTOR ASSEMBLY MUST BE REPLACED if
the seat belt assembly “automatic locking retractor” feature or
any other seat belt function is not operating properly when checked
according to the procedures in Workshop Manual. Failure to replace
the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in
collisions.
Energy Management Feature
• This vehicle has a seat belt system with an energy management
feature at the front outboard seating positions to help further reduce
the risk of injury in the event of a head-on collision.
• The front outboard seat belt systems have a retractor assembly that is
designed to pay out webbing in a controlled manner. This feature is
designed to help reduce the belt force acting on the occupant’s chest.
Outboard safety belt height adjustment
Adjust the height of the shoulder
belt so the belt rests across the
middle of your shoulder.
To adjust the shoulder belt height,
push the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down. Release the
button and pull down on the height
adjuster to make sure it is locked in
place.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
110
Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and
increase the risk of injury in a collision.
Lap belts
Adjusting the lap belt
The lap belt should fit snugly and as low as possible around the
hips, not across the waist.
• 1st row and 3rd row center seating positions
The lap belt does not adjust automatically.
Insert the tongue into the correct
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming
from). To lengthen the belt, turn the
tongue at a right angle to the belt
and pull across your lap until it
reaches the buckle. To tighten the
belt, pull the loose end of the belt
through the tongue until it fits
snugly across the hips.
Shorten and fasten the belt when
not in use.
• 2nd row center seating position (if equipped)
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
111
The lap belt will not adjust automatically. To fasten, grasp the tongue,
and with a continuous motion, pull out enough webbing to buckle the
tongue into the correct buckle. If you did not pull out enough webbing to
reach the buckle, allow the tongue to retract fully before trying to pull it
out again.
Safety belt warning light and indicator chime
The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a
chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts.
Conditions of operation
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light
illuminates 1-2 minutes and the
warning chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled while the indicator
light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and
warning chime turn off.
The driver’s safety belt is
buckled before the ignition
switch is turned to the ON
position...
The safety belt warning light and
indicator chime remain off.
BeltMinder
The BeltMinder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt
warning function. This feature provides additional reminders to the
driver that the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled by intermittently
sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning lamp in the
instrument cluster.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
112
If... Then...
The driver’s safety belt is not
buckled before the vehicle has
reached at least 3 mph (5 km/h)
and 1-2 minutes have elapsed
since the ignition switch has been
turned to ON...
The BeltMinder feature is
activated - the safety belt warning
light illuminates and the warning
chime sounds for 6 seconds every
30 seconds, repeating for
approximately 5 minutes or until
safety belt is buckled.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled
while the safety belt indicator light
is illuminated and the safety belt
warning chime is sounding...
The BeltMinder feature will not
activate.
The driver’s safety belt is buckled
before the ignition switch is turned
to the ON position...
The BeltMinder feature will not
activate.
The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts:
(All statistics based on U.S. data)
Reasons given... Consider...
“Crashes are rare events” 36700 crashes occur every day. The
more we drive, the more we are
exposed to “rare” events, even for
good drivers. 1 in 4 of us will be
seriously injured in a crash during
our lifetime.
“I’m not going far” 3of4fatal crashes occur within 25
miles (40 km) of home.
“Belts are uncomfortable” We design our safety belts to enhance
comfort. If you are uncomfortable -
try different positions for the safety
belt upper anchorage and seatback
which should be as upright as
possible; this can improve comfort.
“I was in a hurry” Prime time for an accident.
BeltMinder reminds us to take a few
seconds to buckle up.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
113
Reasons given... Consider...
“Safety belts don’t work” Safety belts, when used properly,
reduce risk of death to front seat
occupants by 45% in cars, and by
60% in light trucks.
“Traffic is light” Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in
single-vehicle crashes, many when
no other vehicles are around.
“Belts wrinkle my clothes” Possibly, but a serious crash can do
much more than wrinkle your clothes,
particularly if you are unbelted.
“The people I’m with don’t
wear belts”
Set the example, teen deaths occur 4
times more often in vehicles with
TWO or MORE people. Children and
younger brothers/sisters imitate
behavior they see.
“I have an air bag” Air bags offer greater protection when
used with safety belts. Frontal airbags
are not designed to inflate in rear and
side crashes or rollovers.
“I’d rather be thrown clear” Not a good idea. People who are
ejected are 40 times more likely
to DIE. Safety belts help prevent
ejection, WE CAN’T “PICK OUR
CRASH”.
Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt to avoid the Belt
Minder chime. Sitting on the safety belt will increase the risk of
injury in an accident. To disable (one-time) or deactivate the Belt
Minder feature please follow the directions stated below.
One time disable
Any time the safety belt is buckled and then unbuckled during an
ignition ON cycle, the BeltMinder will be disabled for that ignition cycle
only.
Deactivating/activating the BeltMinder feature
Read steps1-5thoroughly before proceeding with the
deactivation/activation programming procedure.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
114
The BeltMinder feature can be deactivated/activated by performing the
following procedure:
Before following the procedure, make sure that:
• the parking brake is set
• the gearshift is in P (Park) (automatic transmission)
• the ignition switch is in the OFF position
• all vehicle doors are closed
• the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled
• the parklamps/headlamps are in OFF position
To reduce the risk of injury, do not deactivate/activate the Belt
Minder feature while driving the vehicle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the RUN (or ON) position. (DO NOT
START THE ENGINE)
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off. (Approximately 1
minute)
• Step 3 must be completed within 60 seconds after the safety belt
warning light turns off.
3. Buckle then unbuckle the safety belt 9 times, ending with the safety
belt in the unbuckled state.
• After step 3 is complete, the safety belt warning light will be turned
on for 3 seconds.
• If step 4 does not occur within 10 seconds at the end of step 3,
Beltminder will automatically exit programming mode without
changing its enable status.
4. Within 10 seconds of the light turning on, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt.
• This will disable the BeltMinder feature if it is currently enabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash 4 times per
second for 3 seconds.
• This will enable the BeltMinder feature if it is currently disabled. As
confirmation, the safety belt warning light will flash 4 times per
second for 3 seconds, followed by 3 seconds with the light off, then
followed by the safety belt warning light flashing 4 times per second
for 3 seconds again.
5. After receiving confirmation, the deactivation/activation procedure is
complete.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
115
Safety belt extension assembly
If the safety belt is too short when fully extended, there is a 8 inch (20
cm) safety belt extension assembly that can be added (part number
611C22). This assembly can be obtained from your dealer at no cost.
Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety
belt. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on
the label. Also, use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too
short for you when fully extended.
Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt
across the torso.
Safety belt maintenance
Inspect the safety belt systems periodically to make sure they work
properly and are not damaged. Inspect the safety belts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if necessary. All safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles, front seat belt buckle
assemblies, buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a collision. Ford Motor Company
recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in
a collision be replaced. However, if the collision was minor and a
qualified technician finds that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not need to be replaced. Safety
belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt
assembly under the above conditions could result in severe
personal injuries in the event of a collision.
Refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
116
AIR BAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Important SRS precautions
The SRS is designed to work with
the safety belt to help protect the
driver and right front passenger
from certain upper body injuries. Air
bags DO NOT inflate slowly; there is
a risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
All occupants of the vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even when an air bag
supplemental restraint system (SRS) is provided.
Always transport children 12 years old and under in the back
seat and always properly use appropriate child restraints.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between an occupant’s chest and the driver air bag module.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
117
Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air
bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries.
To properly position yourself away from the air bag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position.
Do not put anything on or over the air bag module. Placing
objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those
objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing
serious injury.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or modify the air bag
supplemental restraint systems or its fuses. See your Ford or
Lincoln Mercury dealer.
The front passenger air bag is not designed to offer protection to
an occupant in the center front seating position.
Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body structure and tow
hooks) may affect the performance of the air bag system, increasing
the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end of the vehicle.
Additional equipment may affect the performance of the air bag
sensors increasing the risk of injury. Please refer to the Body
Builders Layout Book for instructions about the appropriate
installation of additional equipment.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
118
Children and air bags
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics
suggest that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front
seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
Air bags can kill or injure a
child in a child seat.
NEVER place a rear-facing child
seat in front of an active air bag. If
you must use a forward-facing
child seat in the front seat, move
the seat all the way back.
How does the air bag supplemental restraint system work?
The air bag SRS is designed to
activate when the vehicle sustains a
longitudinal deceleration sufficient
to cause the air bag sensors to close
an electrical circuit that initiates air
bag inflation. The fact that the air
bags did not inflate in a collision
does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it
means the forces were not sufficient
enough to cause activation. Air bags
are designed to inflate in frontal and
near-frontal collisions, not rollover, side-impact, or rear-impacts unless
the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
119
The air bags inflate and deflate
rapidly upon activation. After air bag
deployment, it is normal to notice a
smoke-like, powdery residue or
smell the burnt propellant. This may
consist of cornstarch, talcum
powder or sodium compounds which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but
none of the residue is toxic.
While the SRS is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with
a deploying air bag may also cause
abrasions, swelling or temporary
hearing loss. Because air bags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable
force, there is the risk of death or
serious injuries such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal
injuries, particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of air bag deployment. It is
extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away
from the air bag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control.
The SRS consists of:
• driver and passenger air bag modules (which include the inflators and
air bags)
• one or more impact and safing sensors
• a readiness light and tone
• a diagnostic module
• and the electrical wiring which connects the components
The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the
supplemental air bag electrical system wiring (including the impact
sensors), the system wiring, the air bag system readiness light, the air
bag back up power and the air bag ignitors.
Several air bag system components get hot after inflation. Do not
touch them after inflation.
If the air bag has deployed, the air bag will not function
again and must be replaced immediately. If the air bag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
120
Determining if the system is operational
The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to
indicate the condition of the system. Refer to Air bag readiness section
in the Instrument Cluster chapter. Routine maintenance of the air bag is
not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following:
• The readiness light will either
flash or stay lit.
• The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after
ignition is turned on.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem and/or light are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even intermittently, have the SRS serviced
at your dealership or by a qualified technician immediately. Unless
serviced, the system may not function properly in the event of a
collision.
Disposal of air bags and air bag equipped vehicles
See your local dealership or qualified technician. Air bags MUST BE
disposed of by qualified personnel.
SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN
See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety
restraints for children. Also see Air bag supplemental restraint system
(SRS) in this chapter for special instructions about using air bags.
Important child restraint precautions
You are required by law to use safety restraints for children in the U.S.
and Canada. If small children (generally children who are four years old
or younger and who weigh 40 lbs[18 kg] or less) ride in your vehicle, you
must put them in safety seats made especially for children. Many states
require that children use approved booster seats until they are eight
years old. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle. When
possible, always place children under age 12 in the rear seat of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
121
Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot protect the child from
injury in a collision.
Always follow the instructions and warnings that come with any infant or
child restraint you might use.
Children and safety belts
If the child is the proper size, restrain the child in a safety seat. Children
who are too large for child safety seats (as specified by your child safety
seat manufacturer) should always wear safety belts.
Follow all the important safety restraint and air bag precautions that
apply to adult passengers in your vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion of a combination lap and shoulder belt can
be positioned so it does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face or
neck, the child should wear the lap and shoulder belt. Moving the child
closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt
fit.
Do not leave children, unreliable adults, or pets unattended in
your vehicle.
Child booster seats
Children outgrow a typical convertible or toddler seat when they weigh
40 pounds (18 kg) and are around 4 years of age. Although the
lap/shoulder belt will provide some protection, these children are still too
small for lap/shoulder belts to fit properly, which could increase the risk
of serious injury.
To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who
have outgrown child safety seats, Ford Motor Company recommends use
of a belt-positioning booster.
Booster seats position a child so that safety belts fit better. They lift the
child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees
bend comfortably. Booster seats also make the shoulder belt fit better
and more comfortably for growing children.
When children should use booster seats
Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the
toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and
lap/shoulder belt to fit properly. Generally this is when they weigh about
80 lbs (36 kg) (about 8 to 12 years old).
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
122
Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these
questions:
• Can the child sit all the way back
against the vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the
edge of the seat without
slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
Types of booster seats
There are two types of belt-positioning booster seats:
• Those that are backless.
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the
shield and use the lap/shoulder
belt. If a seating position has a
low seat back and no head
restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child’s head (top
of ear level) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back and lap/shoulder belts.
• Those with a high back.
If, with a backless booster seat,
you cannot find a seating position
that adequately supports your
child’s head, a high back booster
seat would be a better choice.
Both can be used in any vehicle in a seating position equipped with
lap/shoulder belts if your child is over 40 lbs (18 kg).
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
123
The shoulder belt should cross the chest, resting snugly on the center of
the shoulder. The lap belt should rest low and snug across the hips,
never up high across the stomach.
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat, placing a rubberized mesh
sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this
condition.
The importance of shoulder belts
Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child’s
head hitting a hard surface in a collision. For this reason, you should
never use a booster seat with a lap belt only. It is best to use a booster
seat with lap/shoulder belts in the back seat- the safest place for children
to ride.
Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the
booster seat.
Never put the shoulder belt under a child’s arm or behind the
back because it eliminates the protection for the upper part of
the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision.
Never use pillows, books, or towels to boost a child. They can
slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a
collision.
SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN
Child and infant or child safety seats
Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the
child. Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions with the
safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install and use the
safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden stop or
collision.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
124
When installing a child safety seat:
• Review and follow the information
presented in the Air bag
supplemental restraint system
(SRS) section in this chapter.
• Use the correct safety belt buckle
for that seating position (the
buckle closest to the direction the
tongue is coming from).
• Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle until you hear a
snap and feel it latch. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child seat and the release button,
to prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place seat back in upright position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode. Refer to Automatic
locking mode (passenger side front and outboard rear seating
positions) (if equipped) section in this chapter.
• LATCH lower anchors are recommended for use by children up to 48
pounds (22 kg) in a child restraint. Top tether anchors can be used
for children up to 60 pounds (27 kg) in a child restraint, and to
provide upper torso restraint for children up to 80 pounds (36 kg)
using an upper torso harness and a belt-positioning booster.
Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat having a top tether
strap. Install the child safety seat in a seating position with a tether
anchor. For more information on top tether straps and anchors, refer to
Attaching safety seats with tether straps in this chapter.
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s instructions included
with the safety seat you put in your vehicle. If you do not install
and use the safety seat properly, the child may be injured in a sudden
stop or collision.
Rear-facing child seats or infant carriers should never be placed
in the front seats.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
125
Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder
belts
Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. NEVER place a
rear-facing child seat in front of an active air bag. If you must
use a forward-facing child seat in the front seat, move the seat all the
way back.
Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
1. Position the child safety seat in a
seat with a combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Pull down on the shoulder belt
and then grasp the shoulder belt
and lap belt together.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
126
3. While holding the shoulder and
lap belt portions together, route the
tongue through the child seat
according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure
the belt webbing is not twisted.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the
proper buckle (the buckle closest to
the direction the tongue is coming
from) for that seating position until
you hear a snap and feel the latch
engage. Make sure the tongue is
latched securely by pulling on it.
5. To put the retractor in the
automatic locking mode, grasp the
shoulder portion of the belt and pull
downward until all of the belt is
pulled out and a click is heard.
6. Allow the belt to retract. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
127
7. Pull the lap belt portion across
the child seat toward the buckle and
pull up on the shoulder belt while
pushing down with your knee on the
child seat.
8. Allow the safety belt to retract to
remove any slack in the belt.
9. Before placing the child in the
seat, forcibly move the seat forward
and back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check
this, grab the seat at the belt path
and attempt to move it side to side
and forward. There should be no
more than one inch of movement for
proper installation.
10. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is
in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt
out). If the retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt and repeat steps
two through nine.
Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use.
Attaching child safety seats with tether straps
Most new forward-facing child safety seats include a tether strap which
goes over the back of the seat and hooks to an anchoring point. Tether
straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats. Contact
the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a
tether strap.
The second row seats of your vehicle are equipped with built-in tether
strap anchors located behind the seats as described below.
The tether anchors in your vehicle are along the bottom of the seatback
marked with the tether anchor symbol (shown with title).
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions
(shown from top view):
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
128
• Second row 60/40 bench seat
• Second row bucket seats
Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as
shown. The tether strap may not work properly if attached
somewhere other than the correct tether anchor.
1. Position the child safety seat on the seat cushion.
2. Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat.
For vehicles with adjustable head restraints, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the head restraint posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
3. Locate the correct anchor for the selected seating position.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
129
• Second row 60/40 bench seat
Note: In the right seating position, use either tether anchor.
• Second row bucket seats
Note: For each seat, use either tether anchor.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
130
• Third row
• The anchors are on the back of the seat frame.
4. Clip the tether strap hook to the
anchor.
If the tether strap is clipped
incorrectly, the child safety
seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a collision.
5. Refer to the Installing child
safety seats in combination lap
and shoulder belt seating
positions section of this chapter for
further instructions to secure the
child safety seat.
6. Tighten the child safety seat
tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child
being injured in a collision greatly increases.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Seating and Safety Restraints
131
NOTICE TO UTILITY VEHICLE AND TRUCK OWNERS
Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in
the various driving conditions that
are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility
vehicles and trucks are not designed
for cornering at speeds as high as
passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed
to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death from a rollover or other crash you must:
• Avoid sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers;
• Drive at safe speeds for the conditions;
• Keep tires properly inflated;
• Never overload or improperly load your vehicle; and
• Make sure every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants must
wear safety belts and children/infants must use appropriate restraints
to minimize the risk of injury or ejection.
Study your Owner’s Guide and any supplements for specific information
about equipment features, instructions for safe driving and additional
precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury.
VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS
4WD and AWD Systems (if equipped)
A vehicle equipped with AWD or 4WD (when you select the 4WD mode)
has the ability to use all four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
Tires, Wheels and Loading
132
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power
transfer unit. 4WD vehicles allow
you to select different drive modes
as necessary. Information on shifting
procedures and maintenance can be
found in your Owner’s Guide.You
should become thoroughly familiar
with this information before you operate your vehicle.
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4WD
while the vehicle is moving can cause a momentary clunk and ratcheting
sound. These sounds are normal as the front drivetrain comes up to
speed and is not cause for concern.
Do not become overconfident in the ability of 4WD and AWD
vehicles. Although a 4WD or AWD vehicle may accelerate better
than two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations, it won’t stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at a safe speed.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
SUV and trucks can differ from
some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may
be:
• Higher – to allow higher load
carrying capacity and to allow it
to travel over rough terrain
without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter – to give it the capability
to approach inclines and drive
over the crest of a hill without
getting hung up or damaging
underbody components. All other
things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering
inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
133
• Narrower — to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, SUV’s and trucks often
will have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of
gravity between the loaded and
unloaded condition.
These differences that make your
vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.
INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
New vehicles are fitted with tires
that have a rating on them called
Tire Quality Grades. The Quality
grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For
example:
• Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic tires for use on passenger
cars. They do not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in
Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation-Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires Ford to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
134
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices, and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature A B C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
TIRES
Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service, but they
must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them.
Glossary of tire terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the OE (Original Equipment) tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle
can carry.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
135
• Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of
each tire providing information about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and date of manufacture.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing
the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase
the tire’s load carrying capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure: The cold inflation pressure found
on the tire label located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the
front door.
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are seated.
INSPECTING AND INFLATING YOUR TIRES
Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly
inflated. Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
without appearing flat.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
136
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare). Inflate all
tires to the inflation pressure
recommended by Ford Motor
Company.
Inspecting your tires
Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and
remove stones, nails, glass or other objects that may be wedged in the
tread grooves. Check for holes or cuts that may permit air leakage from
the tire and make necessary repairs.
Also inspect the tire sidewalls for cuts, bruises and other damage. If
internal damage to the tire is suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged should not be used because they are more likely
to blow out or fail. Tires can be damaged during off-road use, so
inspection after off-road use is also recommended.
Inflating your tires
Use a tire gauge to check the tire inflation pressure, including the spare,
at least monthly and before long trips. You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as automatic service station gauges may be
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use of a digital or dial type tire
pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause
uneven treadwear patterns.
Under-inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread separation or ⬙blowout⬙,
with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury.
Under-inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It also may
result in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
137
Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure
even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found
on the tire. The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on
the tire label or certification label which is located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.
Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufactures’
maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is normally
higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on either the tire label or certification label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold inflation
pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on
the tire label or certification label.
When weather temperature changes occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10° F(6° C) temperature drop can cause a corresponding
drop of 1 psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check your tire pressures
frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found
on the tire label or certification label.
If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot, (i.e. driven more
than 1 mile [1.6 km]), never “bleed” or reduce air pressure. The tires are
hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire at or below recommended cold
inflation pressure could be significantly under-inflated.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool, meaning they are not hot from driving
even a mile.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire(s), check
and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure
when you get to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air
pressure inside to go up as you drive. Never “bleed” or reduce air
pressure when tires are hot.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
138
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire, including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires require higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. Check the tire label on the B pillar or the edge of the driver’s door
for the recommended spare tire pressure.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts or bulges.
Tire inflation information
All tires with Steel Carcass Plies (if equipped):
This type of tire utilizes steel cords in the sidewalls. As such, they
cannot be treated like normal light truck tires. Tire service, including
adjusting tire pressure, must be performed by personnel trained,
supervised and equipped according to Federal Occupational Safety and
Health Administration (OSHA) regulations. For example, during any
procedure involving tire inflation, the technician or individual must
utilize a remote inflation device, and ensure that all persons are clear of
the trajectory area.
WARNING An inflated tire and rim can be very dangerous if
improperly used, serviced or maintained. To avoid serious injury,
never attempt to re-inflate a tire which has been run flat or seriously
under-inflated without first removing the tire from the wheel assembly
for inspection. Do not attempt to add air to tires or replace tires or
wheels without first taking precautions to protect persons and
property.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
139
TIRE REPLACEMENT REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size
and type (such as P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire or
wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of non-recommended tires and wheels could cause
steering, suspension, axle or transfer case/power transfer unit failure. If
you have questions regarding tire replacement, see an authorized Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
Make sure all tires and wheels on the vehicle are of the same size, type,
tread design, brand, load-carrying capacity and speed rating because it
can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle, which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
You should replace the spare tire when you replace the other road tires
due to the aging of the spare tire.
CHANGING THE TIRES
If you get a flat tire while driving:
• do not brake heavily.
• gradually decrease the vehicle’s speed.
• hold the steering wheel firmly.
• slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road.
The use of tire sealants is not recommended and may damage
your tires.
Dissimilar spare tire/wheel information (if equipped)
Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
140
Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel, then it is intended for temporary
use only. This means that if you need to use it, you should replace it as
soon as possible with a road tire/wheel that is the same size and type as
the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford. If the
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h)
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire/wheel at a time
• Use commercial car washing equipment
• Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare
tire/wheel
The usage of a dissimilar spare tire/wheel can lead to impairment of the
following:
• Handling, stability and braking performance
• Comfort and noise
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs
• Winter weather driving capability
• Wet weather driving capability
• All-Wheel driving capability (if applicable)
• Load leveling adjustment (if applicable)
When driving with the dissimilar spare tire/wheel additional caution
should be given to:
• Towing a trailer
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack
Drive cautiously when using a dissimilar spare tire/wheel and seek
service as soon as possible.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
141
Tire change procedure
To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire,
be sure the parking brake is set, then block (in both directions)
the wheel that is diagonally opposite (other side and end of the
vehicle) to the tire being changed.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone else could be
seriously injured.
1. Park on a level surface, activate
hazard flashers and set the parking
brake.
2. Turn engine OFF and block the
diagonally opposite wheel (block not
provided).
3. Remove the jack, jack handle, lug
wrench and spare tire from the
stowage locations.
4. Use the tip of the lug wrench to remove any wheel trim.
H
OO
D
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
142
5. Loosen each wheel lug nut
one-half turn counterclockwise but
do not remove them until the wheel
is raised off the ground.
When one of the rear
wheels is off the ground,
the transmission alone will not
prevent the vehicle from moving
or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in P (Park)
(automatic transmission). To
prevent the vehicle from moving
when you change the tire, be sure
that the parking brake is set and
the diagonally opposite wheel is
blocked.
6. Insert the hooked end of the jack
handle into the jack and use the
handle to slide the jack under the
vehicle.
7. Position the jack according to the
following guides:
• Front (4x2)
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
143
• Front passenger side (4x4)
• Front driver side (4x4)
Make sure the jack fits into the
notched area on the differential
housing.
• Rear
8. Turn the jack handle clockwise
until the wheel is completely off the
ground and high enough to install
the spare tire.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
144
To lessen the risk of personal injury, do not put any part of your
body under the vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start the
engine when your vehicle is on the jack. The jack is only meant for
changing the tire.
• Never use the front or rear differential as a jacking point.
9. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench.
10. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire, making sure the valve stem
is facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against
the hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been
lowered.
11. Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
12. Remove the jack and fully
tighten the lug nuts in the order
shown. Refer to Wheel lug nut
torque specifications later in this
chapter for the proper lug nut
torque specification.
13. Stow the flat tire, jack, jack
handle and lug wrench. Make sure
the jack is securely fastened so it
does not rattle when driving.
14. Unblock the wheels.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
145
WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 500 miles (800 km)
after any wheel disturbance (rotation, flat tire, wheel removal, etc.).
Bolt size Wheel lug nut torque*
lb.ft. N•m
M14 x 1.5 150 200
* Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and
rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
On all two-piece flat wheel nuts,
apply one drop of motor oil between
the flat washer and the nut. Do not
apply motor oil to the wheel nut
threads or the wheel stud threads.
When a wheel is installed,
always remove any
corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces
of the wheel or the surface of the
front disc brake hub and rotor
that contacts the wheel. Installing
wheels without correct
metal-to-metal contact at the
wheel mounting surfaces can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen
and the wheel to come off while
the vehicle is in motion, resulting
in loss of control.
INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized
information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and
describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and
in case of a recall.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
146
Information on “P” type tires
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
1. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that may be used for
service on cars, SUVs, minivans and
light trucks.
Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it
is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association).
2. 215: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width.
4. R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
6. 95: Indicates the tire’s load index. It is an index that relates to how
much weight a tire can carry. You may find this information in your
Owner’s Guide. If not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
7. H: Indicates the tire’s speed rating. The speed rating denotes the
speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of
time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure. The tires
on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are listed in the following chart.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
147
Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it is not
required by federal law.
Letter rating Speed rating - mph (km/h)
M 81 mph (130 km/h)
N 87 mph (140 km/h)
Q 99 mph (159 km/h)
R 106 mph (171 km/h)
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
U 124 mph (200 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
W 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y 186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
8. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN): This begins with the
letters “DOT” and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers
go to four digits. For example, 2501 means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.
9. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
10. Tire Ply Composition and Material Used: Indicates the number of
plies or the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and
sidewall. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
148
11. Maximum Load: Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire. Refer to the tire label or the
safety certification label, which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver’s door, for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle.
12. Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
• Treadwear: The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150
would wear one and one-half (1
1
⁄
2
) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B,
and C. The grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
13. Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers’ maximum permissible pressure and/or the pressure at
which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. This pressure is
normally higher than the manufacturer’s recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on either the tire label or certification label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional markings, notes or warnings such
as standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
149
Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for “LT” type
tires
“LT” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
1. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association
(T&RA), that is intended for service
on light trucks.
2. Load Range/Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire’s
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
3. Maximum Load Dual lb. (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual;
defined as four tires on the rear axle (a total of six or more tires on the
vehicle).
4. Maximum Load Single lb. (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single;
defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
150
Information on “T” type tires
“T” type tires have some additional
information beyond those of “P”
type tires; these differences are
described below:
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example.
1. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association (T&RA), that is
intended for temporary service on
cars, SUVs, minivans and light
trucks.
2. 145: Indicates the nominal width
of the tire in millimeters from
sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the number, the
wider the tire.
3. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire’s ratio of height to
width. Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall.
4. D: Indicates a “diagonal” type tire.
R: Indicates a “radial” type tire.
5. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the tire label
You will find a tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and
other important information located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
151
TIRE CARE
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can also cause tires to wear
abnormally. Here are some of the important maintenance items:
Tire wear
Measure and inspect the tire tread on all your tires periodically.
Advanced and unusual tire wear can reduce the ability of tread to grip
the road in adverse (wet, snowy, etc.) conditions. Visually check your
tires for uneven wear, looking for high and low areas or unusually
smooth areas. Also check for signs of tire damage.
When the tread is worn down to
1/16th of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning.
Built-in treadwear indicators, or
“wear bars”, which look like narrow
strips of smooth rubber across the
tread will appear on the tire when
the tread is worn down to 1/16th of
an inch (2 mm). When the tire tread
wears down to the same height as
these “wear bars”, the tire is worn
out and should be replaced.
Inspect your tires frequently for any
of the following conditions and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
• Fabric showing through the tire
rubber
• Bulges in the tread or sidewalls
• Cracks or cuts on the sidewalls
• Cracks in the tread groove
• Impact damage resulting from use
• Separation in the tread
• Separation in the sidewall
• Severe abrasion on the sidewall
If your vehicle has a leak in the exhaust system, a road tire or the spare
tire may be exposed to hot exhaust temperatures requiring the tire to be
replaced.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
152
Safety practices
Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking
If your vehicle is stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., do not rapidly
spin the tires; spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an
explosion. A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds.
Never spin the tires in excess of the 35 mph (55 km/h) point
indicated on the speedometer.
Highway hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there’s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic. This may further damage the flat tire, but
your safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If a tire is under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel. If
you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and wheel alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your
vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side when you’re driving, the wheels may be
out of alignment. Have a qualified technician at a Ford or
Lincoln/Mercury dealer check the wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by a qualified technician
at a Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealer. Front wheel drive (FWD) vehicles
and those with an independent rear suspension (if equipped) may
require alignment of all four wheels.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
153
The tires should also be balanced periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear.
Tire rotation
Rotating your tires at the recommended interval (as indicated in the
Scheduled Maintenance Guide that comes with your vehicle) will help
your tires wear more evenly, providing better tire performance and
longer tire life. Unless otherwise specified, rotate the tires approximately
every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
154
• Rear Wheel Drive (RWD)
vehicles/Four Wheel Drive
(4WD)/ All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles (front tires at top of
diagram)
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires.
Note: If your tires show uneven wear ask a qualified technician at a
Ford or Lincoln/Mercury dealership to check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire
rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire/wheel. A
dissimilar spare tire/wheel is defined as a spare tire and/or wheel that is
different in brand, size or appearance from the road tires and wheels. If
you have a dissimilar spare tire/wheel it is intended for temporary use
only and should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated, inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
155
SNOW TIRES AND CHAINS
Snow tires must be the same size and grade as the tires you
currently have on your vehicle.
The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates, you may need to use snow
tires and chains. If you need to use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow tires and chains:
• Use only SAE Class S chains.
• Install chains securely, verifying that the chains do not touch any
wiring, brake lines or fuel lines.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, stop and re-tighten the chains. If this does not work, remove
the chains to prevent damage to your vehicle.
• If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle.
• Remove the tire chains when they are no longer needed. Do not use
tire chains on dry roads.
• The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle
damage. Do not remove these components from your vehicle when
using snow tires and chains.
VEHICLE LOADING – WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehicle’s
Safety Certification Label and Tire Label:
Base Curb Weight – is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of
fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
156
Vehicle Curb Weight – is the weight of your new vehicle when you
picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
Payload – is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the
vehicle is carrying. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found
on the Tire Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door. Look
for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the tire label is the maximum payload for
the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or dealer
installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the
equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the tire label
in order to determine the new payload.
The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by
payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Once
you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle, do not add
more cargo, even if there is space available. Overloading or improperly
loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
157
Cargo Weight – includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment. When towing, trailer tongue load
or king pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) – is the total weight placed on each axle
(front and rear) – including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
158
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These
numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
located on the driver’s door or B-Pillar. The total load on each
axle must never exceed its GAWR.
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits
could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the
vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
Note: For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in
this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your
dealership.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) – is the Vehicle Curb Weight + cargo +
passengers.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
159
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) – is the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle (including all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo).
The GVWR is shown on the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label located on the driver’s
door or B-Pillar. The GVW must
never exceed the GVWR.
Exceeding the Safety Certification Label vehicle weight rating
limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control and personal injury.
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) – is the weight of the loaded vehicle
(GVW) plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Rating) – is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer – including all cargo and
passengers – that the vehicle can handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s braking system is rated for operation at
GVWR, not at GCWR. Separate functional brakes should be used for safe
control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle. The
GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight – is the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It assumes a vehicle with only
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
160
mandatory options, no cargo (internal or external), a tongue load of
10–15% (conventional trailer) or king pin weight of 15–25% (fifth wheel
trailer), and driver only (150 lb. [68 kg]). Consult your dealership (or
the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your dealership) for
more detailed information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin Weight – refers to the amount
of the weight that a trailer pushes down on a trailer hitch.
Examples: For a 5,000 lb. (2,268 kg) conventional trailer, multiply 5,000
by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper tongue load range of 500 to 750 lb.
(227 to 340 kg). For an 11,500 lb. (5,216 kg) fifth wheel trailer, multiply
by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load range of 1,725 to 2,875
lb. (782 to 1,304 kg)
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities
than the originals because they may lower the vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires with a higher limit than the
originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load limit:
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX
kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (1400 – 750 (5 x
150) = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
161
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
The following gives you a few more examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity:
• Another example for your vehicle with 1400 pounds of cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go golfing. You and your friends
average 220 pounds each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30
pounds each. Is there enough load capacity to carry you, 4 of your
friends and all the golf bags? The calculation would be: 1400 – (5 x
220) – (5 x 30) = 1400 – 1100 – 150 = 150 pounds; yes, you have
enough load capacity in your vehicle to transport 4 of your friends and
golf bags.
• A final example for your vehicle with 1400 pounds of cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your friends decide to pick up
cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio
you have planning for the past 2 years. Measuring the inside of the
vehicle with the rear seat folded down, you have room for 12-100
pound bags of cement. Do you have enough load capacity to transport
the cement to your home? If you and your friend each wighed 220
pounds, the calculation would be: 1400 – (2 x 220) – (12 x 100) =
1400 – 440 – 1200 = – 40 pounds; no, you do not have enough cargo
capacity to carry that much weight. You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds. If you remove 3-100 pound cement
bags, then the load calculation would be:
1400 – (2 x 220) – (9 x 100) = 1400 – 440 – 900 = 60 pounds; now you
have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home.
The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Certification label
found on the driver’s door.
Special loading instructions for owners of pickup trucks and
utility-type vehicles
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see the Preparing to drive your vehicle section in
this chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
162
Loaded vehicles may handle differently than unloaded vehicles.
Extra precautions, such as slower speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and placement of the load, hauling cargo and
people may raise the center of gravity of the vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle may tow a Conventional/Class IV trailer provided the
maximum trailer weight is less than or equal to the maximum trailer
weight listed for your engine and rear axle ratio on the following charts.
Your vehicle’s load capacity is designated by weight, not by volume, so
you cannot necessarily use all available space when loading a vehicle.
Towing a trailer places an additional load on your vehicle’s engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect these
components carefully after any towing operation.
The hitch receiver was designed not to be removed. Any
modification or removal of the hitch receiver compromises the
safety benefit it was designed to provide.
4x2 w/automatic transmission
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum
GCWR-lb. (kg)
Maximum
trailer
weight-lb. (kg)
5.4L 3.73 13000 (5897) 6100 (2766)
5.4L 4.10 14500 (6350) 7600 (3466)
6.8L 3.73 17000 (7711) 10000 (4536)
6.8L 4.30 20000 (9072) 11000 (4988)
4x4 w/automatic transmission
Engine Rear axle ratio Maximum
GCWR-kg (lb.)
Maximum
trailer
weight-kg (lb.)
5.4L 4.10 14500 (6350) 7100 (3220)
6.8L 3.73 17000 (7711) 9600 (4354)
6.8L 4.30 20000 (9072) 11000 (4988)
The frame mounted hitch receiver is non-removable.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
163
Towing a Class IV trailer (extra heavy duty) 5,001–11,000 lb.
(2,268–4,536 kg) trailer weight requires a weight-distributing
hitch.
Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer
weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in
engine damage, transmission damage, structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal injury.
Preparing to tow
Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is
properly attached to your vehicle. See your dealer or a reliable trailer
dealer if you require assistance.
Load equalizing hitch
When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface. With the ignition on and
all doors closed, allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it
can level.
2. Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers
at the center of the vehicle.
3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that
the front bumper height is within
1
⁄
2
” (13 mm) of the reference point.
After proper adjustment, the rear bumper should be no higher than in
Step 2.
Note: Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear bumper of the vehicle is
higher than it was unloaded will defeat the function of the load
equalizing hitch and may cause unpredictable handling.
Safety chains
Always connect the trailer’s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers
of the vehicle hitch. To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners.
If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions that the rental agency
gives to you.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
164
Do not attach safety chains to the bumper.
Trailer brakes
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or surge-type trailer brakes are
safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer’s
specifications. The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal
regulations.
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle’s brake system. Your vehicle may not have enough
braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase.
The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the
GVWR not GCWR.
Trailer lamps
Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles. Make sure all running
lights, brake lights, turn signals and hazard lights are working. See your
dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for
hooking up trailer lamps.
Using a step bumper (if equipped)
The rear bumper is equipped with an integral hitch and only requires a
ball with a one inch (25.4 mm) shank diameter. The bumper has a 5,000
lb. (2,270 kg) trailer weight and 500 lb. (227 kg) tongue weight capacity.
If it is necessary to relocate the trailer hitch ball position, a
frame-mounted trailer hitch must be installed.
Driving while you tow
When towing a trailer:
• Turn off the speed control. The speed control may shut off
automatically when you are towing on long, steep grades.
• Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer.
• To eliminate excessive transmission shifting, activate the Tow/Haul (if
equipped) feature. This will also assist in transmission cooling. (For
additional information, refer to the Understanding the positions of
the 5–speed automatic transmission section in this chapter.
• Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
• Do not exceed the GCWR rating or transmission damage may occur.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
165
• Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary or conventional spare
tire. If the spare tire is different in size (diameter and/or width), tread
type (All-Season or All-Terrain) or is from a different manufacturer
other than the road tires on your vehicle, your spare tire is considered
“temporary”. Consult information on the spare tire label for limitations
when using.
Servicing after towing
If you tow a trailer for long distances, your vehicle will require more
frequent service intervals. Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
for more information.
Trailer towing tips
• Practice turning, stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to
get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination. When turning, make
wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached.
• If you are driving down a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear. Do
not apply the brakes continuously, as they may overheat and become
less effective.
• The trailer tongue weight should be 10–15% of the loaded trailer
weight.
• After you have traveled 50 miles (80 km), thoroughly check your
hitch, electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts.
• To aid in engine/transmission cooling and A/C efficiency during hot
weather while stopped in traffic, place the gearshift lever in P (Park).
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade. If you must
park on a grade, place wheel chocks under the trailer’s wheels.
Launching or retrieving a boat
When backing down a ramp during boat launching or retrieval,
• Do not allow the static water level to rise above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than 6 inches (15 cm) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
• Disconnect the trailer tow electrical connector to prevent blown fuses
caused by water entering into your trailer’s electrical wiring.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
166
Exceeding these limits may allow water to enter critical vehicle
components, adversely affecting driveability, emissions and reliability.
Replace front and rear axle lubricants any time the axles have been
submerged in water. Axle lubricant quantities are not to be checked
unless a leak is suspected.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (ALL WHEELS ON THE GROUND)
An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind
a motorhome. Follow these guidelines if you have the need for
recreational towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground.
These guidelines are designed to ensure that your transmission is not
damaged.
2WD vehicles:
• Place the transmission in N (Neutral)
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km)
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 km)
If a distance of 50 miles (80 km) or a speed of 35 mph (56 km) must be
exceeded, the drive shaft will have to be removed before the vehicle is
towed.
Ford recommends the driveshaft be removed/installed only by a qualified
technician. See your local dealer for driveshaft removal/installation.
Improper removal/installation of the driveshaft can cause
transmission fluid loss, damage to the driveshaft and internal
transmission components.
4WD vehicles electronic shift transfer case:
4x4 vehicles with electronic shift on the fly cannot be towed with any
wheels on the ground.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Tires, Wheels and Loading
167
STARTING
Positions of the ignition
1. ACCESSORY, allows the electrical
accessories such as the radio to
operate while the engine is not
running.
2. LOCK, locks the steering wheel,
automatic transmission gearshift
lever and allows key removal.
3. OFF, shuts off the engine and all
accessories without locking the
steering wheel. This position also allows the automatic transmission shift
lever to be moved from the P (Park) position without the brake pedal
being depressed.
When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the
automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted
vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.
4. ON, all electrical circuits operational. Warning lights illuminated. Key
position when driving.
5. START, cranks the engine. Release the key as soon as the engine
starts.
Preparing to start your vehicle
Engine starting is controlled by the powertrain control system. This
system meets all Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment standard
requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio
noise.
When starting a fuel-injected engine, don’t press the accelerator before
or during starting. Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty
starting the engine. For more information on starting the vehicle, refer to
Starting the engine in this chapter.
Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust system, creating the risk
of fire or other damage.
3
1
2
5
4
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
Driving
168
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open the garage door
before you start the engine. See Guarding against exhaust fumes in
this chapter for more instructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important safety precautions
When the engine starts, the idle RPM runs faster to warm the engine. If
the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically, have the vehicle
checked. If your vehicle is operated in a heavy snow storm or blowing
snow conditions, the engine air induction may become partially clogged
with snow and/or ice. If this occurs, the engine may experience a
significant reduction in power output. At the earliest opportunity, clear
all the snow and/or ice away from the air induction inlet. The following
starting instructions are for vehicles equipped with a gasoline engine; if
your vehicle is equipped with a Diesel engine, refer to Starting the
engine in your 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement.
Before starting the vehicle:
1. Make sure all occupants buckle their safety belts. For more
information on safety belts and their proper usage, refer to the Seating
and Safety Restraints chapter.
2. Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
169
• Make sure the parking brake is
set.
• Make sure the gearshift is in P
(Park).
• Turn the key to 4(ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START).
Make sure the corresponding lights illuminate or illuminate briefly. If a
light fails to illuminate, have the vehicle serviced.
HO
O
D
1
2
3
4
5
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
170
• If the driver’s safety belt is fastened, the light may not illuminate.
Starting the engine
1. Turn the key to 4 (ON) without
turning the key to 5 (START).
2. Turn the key to 5 (START), then
release the key as soon as the
engine starts. Excessive cranking
could damage the starter.
Note: If the engine does not start within five seconds on the first try,
turn the key to 3 (OFF), wait 10 seconds and try again. If the engine still
fails to start, press the accelerator to the floor and try again; this will
allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is
flooded with fuel.
Using the engine block heater (if equipped)
Use of an engine block heater is
strongly recommended if you live in
a region where temperatures reach
-10°F (-23°C) or below. For best
results, plug the heater in at least
three hours before starting the
vehicle. The heater can be plugged
in the night before starting the
vehicle. The plug for the block
heater is exposed in the front of the
vehicle, beneath the grille. Vehicles
equipped with a gasoline engine have the plug exposed on the driver
side of the vehicle; vehicles equipped with a Diesel engine have the plug
exposed on the passenger side of the vehicle.
To reduce the risk of electrical shock, do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or two-pronged (cheater)
adapters.
Guarding against exhaust fumes
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. Take precautions to avoid
its dangerous effects.
3
2
1
5
4
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
171
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your dealer
inspect your vehicle immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Important ventilating information
If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of
time, open the windows at least one inch (2.5 cm) or adjust the heating
or air conditioning to bring in fresh air.
BRAKES
Occasional brake noise is normal. If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding
or continuous squeal sound is present, the brake linings may be worn-out
and should be inspected by a qualified service technician. If the vehicle
has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
the vehicle should be inspected by a qualified service technician.
Refer to Brake system warning
light in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for information on the brake
system warning light.
Four-wheel anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Your vehicle is equipped with an Anti-lock Braking System (ABS). This
system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking. Noise from the ABS pump motor and
brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the
brake pedal may suddenly travel a little further as soon as ABS braking
is done and normal brake operation resumes. These are normal
characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern.
ABS warning lamp
The ABS lamp in the instrument
cluster momentarily illuminates
when the ignition is turned on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the
ABS may be disabled and may need to be serviced.
ABS
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
172
Even when the ABS is disabled,
normal braking is still effective. (If
your BRAKE warning lamp
illuminates with the parking brake
released, have your brake system serviced immediately.)
Using ABS
When hard braking is required, apply continuous force on the brake
pedal; do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the
effectiveness of the ABS and will increase your vehicle’s stopping
distance. The ABS will be activated immediately, allowing you to retain
full steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces.
However, the ABS does not decrease stopping distance.
Parking brake
To set the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down until the
pedal stops.
The BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster illuminates and
remains illuminated until the
parking brake is released.
H
O
O
D
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
173
Pull the right side of the release
lever to release the parking brake;
the release lever pulls at an angle
toward the driver’s door. To prevent
the pedal from releasing too quickly,
place your left foot on the parking
brake pedal, then pull the release
lever, making sure the pedal fully
releases. You may want to pull the
release lever again to make sure the
parking brake is full released.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
If you’re parking your vehicle on a grade or with a trailer, press and hold
the brake pedal down, then set the parking brake. There may be a little
vehicle movement as the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle’s weight.
This is normal and should be no reason for concern. If needed, press and
hold the service brake pedal down, then try reapplying the parking
brake. Chock the wheels if required. If the parking brake cannot hold the
weight of the vehicle, the parking brake may need to be serviced or the
vehicle may be overloaded.
STEERING
To prevent damage to the power steering system:
• Never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points (until it
stops) for more than a few seconds when the engine is running.
• Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level
(below the FULL COLD mark on the dipstick).
If the power steering system breaks down (or if the engine is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually, but it takes more effort.
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper steering alignment
HOOD
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
174
If any steering components are serviced or replaced, install new
fasteners (many are coated with thread adhesive or have prevailing
torque features which may not be re-used). Never re-use a bolt or nut.
Torque fasteners to specifications in Workshop Manual.
A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander/pull.
TRACTION-LOK AXLE (IF EQUIPPED)
This axle provides added traction on slippery surfaces, particularly when
one wheel is on a poor traction surface. Under normal conditions, the
Traction-Lok axle functions like a standard rear axle. The axle may
exhibit a slight noise or vibration in tight turns with low vehicle speed.
This is normal behavior and indicates the axle is working.
PREPARING TO DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than
other types of vehicles.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a safety belt.
Your vehicle has larger tires and increased ground clearance, giving the
vehicle a higher center of gravity than a passenger car.
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
Loaded vehicles, with a higher center of gravity, may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles. Extra precautions such as
slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when
driving a heavily loaded vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
175
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION
Brake-shift interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift interlock feature that prevents
the gearshift lever from being moved from P (Park) when the ignition is
in the ON position unless brake pedal is depressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P (Park) with ignition in
the ON position and the brake pedal depressed:
1. Apply the parking brake, turn ignition key to LOCK, then remove the
key.
2. Insert the key and turn it to OFF. Apply the brake pedal and shift
to N (Neutral).
When the key is in the ignition and in the OFF position, the
automatic transmission shift lever can be moved from the P
(Park) position without the brake pedal depressed. To avoid unwanted
vehicle movement, always set the parking brake.
3. Start the vehicle.
If it is necessary to use the above procedure to move the gearshift lever,
it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle’s brakelamps are not
operating properly. Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside
Emergencies chapter.
Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps
are working.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician as soon as possible.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
176
Understanding the gearshift positions of the 4–speed automatic
transmission (if equipped-gasoline engines only)
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift
scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
177
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
(Overdrive)
The normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. Transmission
operates in gears one through four.
(Overdrive) can be deactivated
by pressing the transmission control
switch on the end of the gearshift
lever.
This transmission control indicator
light (TCIL) will illuminate on the
end of the gearshift.
Note: If the Overdrive OFF light
flashes steadily at any time, have
the system serviced immediately.
Drive (not shown)
Drive is activated when the transmission control switch is pressed.
• This position allows for all forward gears except overdrive.
• O/D OFF lamp is illuminated.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use when driving conditions cause excessive shifting from O/D to
other gears. Examples: city traffic, hilly terrain, heavy loads, trailer
towing and when engine braking is required.
• To return to O/D (overdrive mode), press the transmission control
switch. The O/D OFF lamp will not be illuminated.
• O/D (Overdrive) is automatically returned each time the key is turned
off regardless of last mode of operation.
2 (Second)
This position allows for second gear only.
• Provides engine braking.
• Use to start-up on slippery roads.
• To return to
(Overdrive), move the gearshift lever into the
(Overdrive) position.
OVERDRIVE
OFF
OVERDRIVE
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
178
• Selecting 2 (Second) at higher speeds will cause the transmission to
downshift to second gear at the appropriate vehicle speed.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• Will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; allows for 1 (First)
when vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in
(Overdrive) or Drive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
Understanding the shift positions of the 5–speed automatic
transmission (if equipped-Diesel engines only)
This vehicle is equipped with an adaptive Transmission Shift Strategy.
Adaptive Shift Strategy offers the optimal transmission operation and
shift quality. When the vehicle’s battery has been disconnected for any
type of service or repair, the transmission will need to relearn the normal
shift strategy parameters, much like having to reset your radio stations
when your vehicle battery has been disconnected. The Adaptive
Transmission Strategy allows the transmission to relearn these operating
parameters. This learning process could take several transmission
upshifts and downshifts; during this learning process, slightly firmer
shifts may occur. After this learning process, normal shift feel and shift
scheduling will resume.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
turning.
To put your vehicle in gear:
• Start the engine
• Depress the brake pedal
• Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
179
To put your vehicle in P (Park):
• Come to a complete stop
• Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P (Park)
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
R (Reverse)
With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse), the vehicle will move backward.
Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R
(Reverse).
N (Neutral)
With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral), the vehicle can be started and is
free to roll. Hold the brake pedal down while in this position.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul OFF is the normal driving position for the
best fuel economy. The overdrive function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through five.
D (Overdrive) with Tow/Haul ON
The Tow/Haul feature improves transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission gear ranges are available when
using Tow/Haul.
To activate Tow/Haul, press the
button on the end of the gearshift
lever.
The TOW HAUL indicator light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
180
Tow/Haul delays upshifts to reduce frequency of transmission shifting.
Tow/Haul also provides engine braking in all forward gears when the
transmission is in the D (Overdrive) position; this engine braking will
slow the vehicle and assist the driver in controlling the vehicle when
descending a grade. Depending on driving conditions and load
conditions, the transmission may downshift, slow the vehicle and control
the vehicle speed when descending a hill, without the accelerator pedal
being pressed. The amount of downshift braking provided will vary based
upon the amount the brake pedal is depressed.
To deactivate the Tow/Haul feature and return to normal driving mode,
press the button on the end of the gearshift lever. The TOW HAUL light
will no longer be illuminated.
When you shut-off and restart the engine, the transmission will
automatically return to normal D (Overdrive) mode (Tow/Haul OFF).
Do not use the Tow/Haul feature when driving in icy or slippery
conditions as the increased engine braking can cause the rear
wheels to slide and the vehicle to swing around with the possible loss
of vehicle control.
3 (Third)
Transmission operates up to third gear only.
Used for improved traction on slippery roads. Selecting 3 (Third)
provides engine braking.
2 (Second)
Use 2 (Second) to start-up on slippery roads or to provide additional
engine braking on downgrades.
1 (First)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• Allows upshifts by moving gearshift lever.
• The transmission will not downshift into 1 (First) at high speeds; it
will downshift to a lower gear and then shift into 1 (First) when the
vehicle reaches slower speeds.
Forced downshifts
• Allowed in
(Overdrive) or Drive.
• Depress the accelerator to the floor.
• Allows transmission to select an appropriate gear.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
181
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow, it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
The Reverse Sensing System (RSS) sounds a tone to warn the driver of
obstacles near the rear bumper when the R (Reverse) is selected and the
vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph (5 km/h). The system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain
angular or moving objects.
To help avoid personal injury, please read and understand the
limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this
section. Reverse sensing is only an aid for some (generally large and
fixed) objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at “parking
speeds”. Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS;
this may include reduced performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always use caution when in R
(Reverse) and when using the RSS.
This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or
moving objects. The system is designed to provide a warning to
assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect smaller objects, particularly
those close to the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large trailer hitches, bike or
surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
182
The RSS detects obstacles up to six
feet (two meters.) from the rear
bumper with a decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper, (refer to the figures for
approximate zone coverage areas).
As you move closer to the obstacle,
the rate of the tone increases. When
the obstacle is less than 10 inches
(25.0 cm) away, the tone will sound
continuously. If the RSS detects a
stationary or receding object further
than 10 inches (25.0 cm) from the
side of the vehicle, the tone will
sound for only three seconds. Once
the system detects an object
approaching, the tone will sound
again.
The RSS automatically turns on
when the gear selector is placed in
R (Reverse) and the ignition is ON.
An RSS control on the instrument
panel allows the driver to turn the RSS on and off. To turn the RSS off,
the ignition must be ON, and the gear selector in R (Reverse). An
indicator light on the control will illuminate when the system is turned
off. If the indicator light illuminates when the RSS is not turned off, it
may indicate a failure in the RSS. The RSS will remain off until either
the RSS control is pushed again or the ignition switch is recycled
Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rear bumper/fascia) free
from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the
sensors with sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the RSS.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper/fascia, leaving
it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered causing
inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
183
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD) OPERATION (IF EQUIPPED)
For important information regarding safe operation of this type
of vehicle, see Preparing to drive your vehicle in this chapter.
When four–wheel drive (4WD) is engaged, power is supplied to all four
wheels through a transfer case. 4WD can be selected when additional
driving power is desired.
4WD operation is not recommended on dry pavement. Doing so could
result in difficult disengagement of the transfer case, increased tire wear
and decreased fuel economy.
Electronic shift on the fly (ESOF) 4x4 system (if equipped)
If equipped with the Electronic Shift 4WD System, and 4WD Low
is selected while the vehicle is moving, the 4WD system will not
engage. This is normal and should be no reason for concern.
Before 4WD Low can be engaged, the vehicle must be brought to
a complete stop, the brake pedal depressed and the transmission
placed in N (Neutral).
The 4WD system:
• provides 4x4 High engagement and disengagement while the vehicle is
moving.
• is operated by a rotary control located on the instrument panel that
allows you select 2WD, 4x4 High or 4x4 Low operation.
• uses auto-manual hub locks that can be engaged and disengaged
automatically based on the 4x4 mode selected.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
184
• auto-manual hub locks can be
manually overridden by rotating
the hub lock control from AUTO
to LOCK if desired.
• automatic operation of the
hub locks is recommended, and
will increase fuel economy
• For proper operation, make
sure that the arrow and the
indicator dot on the hub are
aligned, and that both hub
locks are set the same (both
set to AUTO or both set to
LOCK).
4WD system indicator lights
The 4WD system indicator lights illuminate only under the following
conditions. If these lights illuminate when driving in 2WD, contact your
Ford dealer as soon as possible.
• 4x4 - momentarily illuminates
after the engine is started.
Illuminates when 4H (4x4 High)
or 4L (4x4 Low) is engaged.
• LOW RANGE – momentarily
illuminates when the ignition is
turned to the ON position.
Illuminates when 4L (4x4 Low) is
engaged.
Using the electronic shift 4WD system (if equipped)
Positions of the electronic shift system
The electronic shift 4WD system is designed to allow up to 45
seconds before a shift command is performed. In the event that
conflicting shift commands are selected, allow up to 45 seconds
for the shift command to be performed prior to reporting any
shift concerns to your dealer.
Note: Some noise may be heard as the 4WD system shifts or engages.
This is normal.
2H (2WD High) – For general on-road driving. Sends power to the rear
wheels only.
4x4
LOW
RANGE
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
185
4H (4WD High) – For winter and off-road conditions. Sends power to
front and rear wheels.
4L (4WD Low)– For low-speed off-road applications that require extra
power such as steep grades, deep sand or pulling a boat out of the water.
Sends power to front and rear wheels.
Shifting from 2WD (2WD High) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High)
Rotate the 4WD control to the 4x4
HIGH position at speeds up to 55
mph (88 km/h).
• The electronic shift 4WD
system is designed to engage
4x4 HIGH (4WD High) when
the vehicle is moving. If
shifted to 4x4 HIGH (4WD
HIGH) while at complete stop,
4x4 may not engage and the
4x4 indicator may not
illuminate until the vehicle is driven above 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Do not shift into 4x4 HIGH with the rear wheels slipping.
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 2WD (2WD High)
Rotate the 4WD control to 2WD at
any forward speed. Disengagement
of the transfer case and front hubs
may be delayed due to torque bind
which is caused by driving on dry
hard surfaces or performing tight
turns while using the 4WD system.
• You do not need to operate the vehicle in R (Reverse) to disengage
your front hubs, but it will eliminate any torque bind and allow the
system to immediately disengage.
Shifting from 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) to 4x4 LOW (4WD Low)
1. Bring the vehicle to either a complete stop or vehicle speed below 3
mph (5 km/h).
2. Depress the brake.
4X4
HIGH
2WD
4X4
LOW
4X4
HIGH
2WD
4X4
LOW
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
186
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral).
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4
LOW position.
5. Hold the shift conditions until the
LOW RANGE indicator light
illuminates.
6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light
does not illuminate within 15
seconds, drive the vehicle above 5
mph (8 km/h), then repeat steps 1
through 5 before reporting any shift
concerns to your dealer.
Shifting from 4x4 LOW (4WD Low) to 4x4 HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD
(2WD High)
1. Bring the vehicle to either a complete stop or vehicle speed below 3
mph (5 km/h).
2. Depress the brake.
3. Place the gearshift in N (Neutral).
4. Move the 4WD control to the 4x4
HIGH (4WD High) or 2WD (2WD
High) position.
5. Hold the shift conditions until the
LOW RANGE indicator light shuts
off.
6. If the LOW RANGE indicator light
does not shut off within 15
seconds, drive the vehicle above 5
mph (8 km/h), then repeat steps 1
through 5 before reporting any shift concerns to your dealer.
Driving off-road with truck and utility vehicles
4WD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand, snow, mud and
rough terrain and have operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on and off the road.
How your vehicle differs from other vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from some other vehicles. Your
vehicle may be higher to allow it to travel over rough terrain without
getting hung up or damaging underbody components.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
187
The differences that make your vehicle so versatile also make it handle
differently than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all times, especially in rough terrain.
Since sudden changes in terrain can result in abrupt steering wheel
motion, make sure you grip the steering wheel from the outside. Do not
grip the spokes.
Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage from concealed objects such as
rocks and stumps.
You should either know the terrain or examine maps of the area before
driving. Map out your route before driving in the area. To maintain
steering and braking control of your vehicle, you must have all four
wheels on the ground and they must be rolling, not sliding or spinning.
Basic operating principles
• Do not use 4WD on dry, hard surfaced roads. Doing so will produce
excessive noise, increase tire wear and may damage drive components.
4WD modes are only intended for consistently slippery or loose
surfaces.
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by
loose sand, water, gravel, snow or ice.
If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement, slow down, but
avoid severe brake application, ease the vehicle back onto the
pavement only after reducing your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow
down gradually before returning to the pavement. You may lose
control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too
sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small objects, such as highway
reflectors, with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a
sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or roll over. Remember, your safety and the
safety of others should be your primary concern.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
188
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
If your vehicle gets stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by
shifting between forward and reverse gears, stopping between shifts, in a
steady pattern. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating
temperature or damage to the transmission may occur.
Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage
to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
Emergency maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn
must be made, remember to avoid “over-driving” your vehicle, i.e.,
turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid
the emergency. Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control,
not more. Additionally, smooth variations of the accelerator and/or
brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering, acceleration or braking which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover
and/or personal injury. Use all available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel movements.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
189
Vehicles with a higher center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently than vehicles with a
lower center of gravity. Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive speed and abrupt
maneuvers in these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another (i.e., from
concrete to gravel) there will be a change in the way the vehicle
responds to a maneuver (steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Parking
On some 4WD vehicles, when the transfer case is in the N (Neutral)
position, the engine and transmission are disconnected from the rest of
the driveline. Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic
transmission is in P (Park). Do not leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the N (Neutral) position. Always set the parking brake
fully and turn off the ignition when leaving the vehicle.
Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is
latched in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the LOCK position and
remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be working properly.
See your dealer or a qualified service technician.
4WD Systems
4WD (when you select a 4WD mode), uses all four wheels to power the
vehicle. This increases traction, enabling you to drive over terrain and
road conditions that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle cannot.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
190
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case. On 4WD
vehicles, the transfer case allows
you to select 4WD when necessary.
Information on transfer case
operation and shifting procedures
can be found in the Driving
chapter. Information on transfer
case maintenance can be found in the Maintenance and Specifications
chapter. You should become thoroughly familiar with this information
before you operate your vehicle.
Normal characteristics
On some 4WD models, the initial shift from two-wheel drive to 4x4 while
the vehicle is moving can cause some momentary clunk and ratcheting
sounds. This is the front drivetrain coming up to speed and the
automatic locking hubs engaging and is not cause for concern.
Sand
When driving over sand, try to keep all four wheels on the most solid
area of the trail. Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift to a lower
gear and drive steadily through the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.
If you must reduce the tire pressure for whatever reason in sand, make
sure you re-inflate the tires as soon as possible.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you
and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may
be required from another vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with caution.
Mud and water
If you must drive through high
water, drive slowly. Traction or
brake capability may be limited.
When driving through water,
determine the depth; avoid water
higher than the bottom of the hubs
(if possible) and proceed slowly. If
the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
191
Once through water, always try the brakes. Wet brakes do not stop the
vehicle as effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be improved by moving
your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you
are driving in mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud. As
when you are driving over sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does slide, steer in the direction of
the slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
If the transmission, transfer case or front axle are submerged in water,
their fluids should be checked and changed, if necessary.
Driving through deep water may damage the transmission.
Refer to Transmission temperature gauge in the Instrument Cluster
chapter for transmission fluid temperature information.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water, the axle lubricant should
be replaced.
After driving through mud, clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts
and tires. Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an
imbalance that could damage drive components.
“Tread Lightly” is an educational
program designed to increase public
awareness of land-use regulations
and responsibilities in our nations
wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and the Bureau of Land
Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and
other public and private lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on hilly or sloping terrain
Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up
or down a hill or steep incline, you should always try to drive straight up
or straight down. Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep
slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing traction, slipping sideways and
possibly rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill, determine beforehand
the route you will use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side. Do not drive in reverse
over a hill without the aid of an observer.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
192
When climbing a steep slope or hill,
start in a lower gear rather than
downshifting to a lower gear from a
higher gear once the ascent has
started. This reduces strain on the
engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to
turn around because you might roll
over. It is better to back down to a
safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill. Too much
power will cause the tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Descend a hill in the same gear you
would use to climb up the hill to
avoid excessive brake application
and brake overheating. Do not
descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually
shift to a lower gear. When
descending a steep hill, avoid
sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. When you brake hard,
the front wheels can’t turn and if
they aren’t turning, you won’tbe
able to steer. The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the
vehicle. Rapid pumping of the brake pedal will help you slow the vehicle
and still maintain steering control.
Apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes.
Driving on snow and ice
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but
can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on
snow and ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting
from a full stop.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
193
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although a 4WD vehicle may accelerate
better than a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it won’t stop any
faster, because as in other vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels. Do
not become overconfident as to road conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles
for stopping. Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower
gears. In emergency stopping situations, avoid locking of the wheels. Use
a “squeeze” technique, push on the brake pedal with a steadily increasing
force which allows the wheels to brake yet continue to roll so that you
may steer in the direction you want to travel. If you lock the wheels,
release the brake pedal and repeat the squeeze technique. Apply the
brake steadily. Do not “pump” the brakes. Refer to the Brakes section of
this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti-lock
brake system.
Never drive with chains on the front tires of 4WD vehicles without also
putting them on the rear tires. This could cause the rear to slide and
swing around during braking.
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed
and tested to provide predictable performance whether loaded or empty
and durable load carrying capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such
as adding or removing parts (such as lift kits or stabilizer bars) or by
using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make
it more likely the vehicle will roll over as a result of a loss of control.
Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such as ladder racks or pickup box
cover).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty, increase
your repair cost, reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities
and adversely affect driver and passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to
heavy off-road usage.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
194
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable, proceed very
slowly especially when the depth is not known. Never drive through
water that is higher than the bottom of the hubs (for trucks) or the
bottom of the wheel rims (for cars). When driving through water,
traction or brake capability may be limited. Also, water may enter your
engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may
stall. Driving through deep water where the transmission vent
tube is submerged may allow water into the transmission and
cause internal transmission damage.
Once through the water, always dry the brakes by moving your
vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Driving
195
GETTING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern, Ford Motor
Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program. This
program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. The service
is available:
• 24–hours, seven days a week
• for the New Vehicle Limited Warranty period of three years or 36,000
miles (60,000 km), whichever occurs first on Ford and Mercury
vehicles, and four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km) on Lincoln
vehicles.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• a flat tire change with a good spare (except Ford GT which has a tire
inflation kit)
• battery jump start
• lock-out assistance (key replacement cost is the customer’s
responsibility)
• fuel delivery (2.0 gallons [7.5L], maximum two occurrences within 12
month period)
• towing of your disabled vehicle to the nearest Ford Motor Company
dealership, or your selling dealer if within 35 miles (56.3 km) of the
nearest Ford Motor Company dealership (one tow per disablement).
Even non-warranty related tows, like accidents, are covered (some
exclusions apply, such as impound towing or repossession).
Canadian customers refer to your Owner Information Guide for
information on:
• coverage period
• exact fuel amounts
• towing of your disabled vehicle
• emergency travel expense reimbursement
• travel planning benefits
USING ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. In the United States, this card is found in the
Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment. In Canada, the card is
found in the Owner Information Guide in the glove compartment.
U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicle customers who require roadside assistance,
call 1–800–241–3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Emergencies
196
Canadian customers who require roadside assistance, call
1–800–665–2006.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself, Ford Motor
Company will reimburse a reasonable amount. To obtain reimbursement
information, U.S. Ford or Mercury vehicles customers call
1-800-241-3673; Lincoln vehicle customers call 1–800–521–4140.
Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information, call
1–800–665–2006.
ROADSIDE COVERAGE BEYOND BASIC WARRANTY
In the United States, you may purchase additional roadside assistance
coverage beyond this period through the Ford Auto Club by contacting
your Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealer.
Similarly in Canada, for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage, you
may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty’s Roadside
Assistance expiring. For more information and enrollment, contact
1–877–294–2582 or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD FLASHER
The hazard flasher is located on the
steering column, just behind the
steering wheel. The hazard flashers
will operate when the ignition is in
any position or if the key is not in
the ignition.
Push in the flasher control and all
front and rear direction signals will
flash. Press the flasher control again
to turn them off. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and is creating a
safety hazard for other motorists.
Note: With extended use, the flasher may run down your battery.
FUEL PUMP SHUT-OFF SWITCH
This device stops the electric fuel pump from sending fuel to the engine
when your vehicle has had a substantial jolt.
After an accident, if the engine cranks but does not start, this switch
may have been activated.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
197
This switch is located in the front
passenger’s footwell, behind the kick
panel access cover.
To reset the switch:
1. Turn the ignition OFF.
2. Check the fuel system for leaks.
3. If no leaks are apparent, reset the
switch by pushing in on the reset
button.
4. Turn the ignition ON.
5. Wait a few seconds and return
the key to OFF.
6. Make another check for leaks.
FUSES AND RELAYS
Fuses
If electrical components in the
vehicle are not working, a fuse may
have blown. Blown fuses are
identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Note: Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire
damage and could start a fire.
15
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
198
Standard fuse amperage rating and color
COLOR
Fuse
rating
Mini
fuses
Standard
fuses
Maxi
fuses
Cartridge
maxi
fuses
Fuse link
cartridge
2A Grey Grey ———
3A Violet Violet ———
4A Pink Pink ———
5A Tan Tan ———
7.5A Brown Brown ———
10A Red Red ———
15A Blue Blue ———
20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue
25A Natural Natural ———
30A Green Green Green Pink Pink
40A ——Orange Green Green
50A ——Red Red Red
60A ——Blue — Yellow
70A ——Tan — Brown
80A ——Natural — Black
Passenger compartment fuse panel / power distribution box
The fuse panel is located below and to the left of the steering wheel by
the brake pedal. Remove the panel cover to access the fuses.
To remove the fuse panel cover,
turn the panel fasteners
counterclockwise.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
199
To remove a fuse use the fuse puller
tool provided on the fuse panel
cover.
Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current
fuses.
Always replace the cover to the passenger compartment fuse
panel/power distribution box before reconnecting the battery.
If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected, refer to the
Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
200
The fuses are coded as follows.
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
1 15A* Adjustable pedals
2 20A* Power point - floor console
3 20A* Power point – 3rd row
4 20A* Power point - I/P
5 20A* Power point - right rear quarter
6 20A* Trailer tow turn/stop relay
7 30A* High beam headlamps / Flash to pass
8 15A* Backup lamps (Diesel engine only)
9 20A* Heated mirrors
10 10A* A/C clutch
11 20A* Radio (main)
12 20A* Cigar lighter/OBD II
13 5A* Power mirrors/switches
14 15A* Daytime running lamps (DRL)
15 10A* Driver’s seat module memory
16 15A* Rear seat controller
17 15A* Exterior lamps
18 20A* Turn lamps/Brake on-off switch (high)
19 10A* Body Security Module (BSM)/4x4
module
20 10A* Fuel Injection Control Module (FICM)
relay (Diesel engine only)
21 25A* Rear smart wiper motor
22 20A* Engine control
23 20A* Engine control (gasoline engine only),
Climate control (Diesel engine only)
24 2A* Brake pressure switch/Speed control
25 10A* 4-Wheel Anti-Lock Brake System
(4WABS) module, Variable Fan
Control (VFC) (Diesel engine only)
26 10A* Airbags
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
201
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
27 15A* Ignition switch Run feed
28 10A* EATC module/Front blower relay coil
29 10A* Customer access
30 15A* Highbeam headlamps
31 15A* Transmission range sensor (then to
starter relay coil), 4x4
32 5A* Radio (start)
33 15A* Front wiper
34 10A* Brake on-off switch
35 10A* Instrument cluster
36 10A* PCM Memory
37 15A* Horn
38 20A* Trailer tow park lamps
39 15A* Trailer tow back-up lamps
40 20A* Fuel pump
41 10A* Instrument cluster
42 15A* Delayed accessory
43 10A* Fog lamps
44 10A* PATS module, Transceiver
45 10A* Ignition switch Run/Start feed
46 10A* Left-hand lowbeam
47 10A* Right-hand lowbeam
48 10A* Rear smart wiper motor
101 30A** Trailer tow electric brake
102 30A** Door locks, BSM
103 50A** Ignition switch (gasoline engine only),
FICM power (Diesel engine only)
104 40A** Heated backlight
105 30A** Fuel heater (Diesel engine only)
106 30A** Front wiper main
107 40A** Front blower motor
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
202
Fuse/Relay
Location
Fuse Amp
Rating
Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel Description
108 40A** Auxiliary blower motor
109 30A** Heated seats
110 50A** Ignition switch
111 30A** 4WD/Shift on the fly
112 30A** Left-hand power seats
113 30A** Starter motor
114 30A** Right-hand power seats
115 20A** Trailer tow battery charge
116 30A** Ignition switch
601 30A CB Window motors, Moonroof
602 60A** 4WABS module
210 — Not used
211 — Backup lamps relay (Diesel engine
only)
212 — Not used
301 — Front blower motor relay
302 — Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
relay
303 — Fuel heater relay (Diesel engine only)
304 — Heated backlight relay
305 — Trailer tow battery charge relay
306 — Delayed accessory relay
307 — Starter relay
* Mini Fuses ** Maxi Fuses ***Circuit Breaker
Note: (Diesel engine only) The Fuel Injection Control Module (FICM)
logic 15A mini-fuse is located in the underhood relay block.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
203
JUMP STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames,
sparks, or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result in injury or
vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin, eyes and
clothing, if contacted.
Do not attempt to push-start your vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start capability; doing so may
damage the catalytic converter.
Preparing your vehicle
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the
transmission must relearn its shift strategy. As a result, the transmission
may have firm and/or soft shifts. This operation is considered normal and
will not affect function or durability of the transmission. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation.
1. Use only a 12–volt supply to start your vehicle.
2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could
damage the vehicle’s electrical system.
3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle
making sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set the parking brake on
both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving
parts.
4. Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before
you attach the battery cables. Ensure that vent caps are tight and level.
5. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect any electrical
surges. Turn all other accessories off.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
204
Connecting the jumper cables
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the discharged battery.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal of the assisting battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
205
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
assisting battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to an exposed
metal part of the stalled vehicle’s engine, away from the battery and the
carburetor/fuel injection system. Do not use fuel lines, engine rocker
covers or the intake manifold as grounding points.
Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the battery.
5. Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades, belts, moving parts of
both engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at
moderately increased speed.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
206
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been started, run both engines for an
additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the jumper cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were
connected.
1. Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface.
Note: In the illustrations, lightning bolts are used to designate the
assisting (boosting) battery.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the negative (-) connection of the
booster vehicle’s battery.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
207
3. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle’s battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the
disabled vehicle’s battery.
After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables
removed, allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can
relearn its idle conditions.
+
–
+
–
+
–
+
–
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
208
WRECKER TOWING
If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact a professional towing
service or, if you are a member of a roadside assistance program, your
roadside assistance service provider.
On 4x2 vehicles, it is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the front wheels
on the ground and the rear wheels off the ground using a wheel lift.
On 4x4 vehicles, it is recommended that your vehicle be towed with
flatbed equipment with all the wheels off the ground. However, if flatbed
equipment is not available, a wheel lift may be used to lift the rear of the
vehicle as long as the Electronic Shift-On-the-Fly (ESOF) 4WD control is
in the 2WD position.
If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly, vehicle
damage may occur.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow
truck operators. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for
proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Roadside Emergencies
209
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED
At home
You must take your Ford vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer for
warranty repairs. While any Ford dealership handling your vehicle line
will provide warranty service, we recommend you return to your selling
dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction. Please note that
certain warranty repairs require special training and/or equipment, so not
all dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair needed, you may have to take
your vehicle to another dealer. A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the dealership. Repairs will
be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or remanufactured or other
parts that are authorized by Ford.
If you have questions or concerns, or are unsatisfied with the service you
are receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing dealership.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company
policies or procedures, please contact the Ford Customer Relationship
Center at the number below.
Away from home
If you own a Ford or Mercury vehicle and are away from home when
your vehicle needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership
could provide, after following the steps described above, contact the
Ford Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to
help you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Customer Relationship Centre
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance
210
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
www.ford.ca
If you own a Lincoln vehicle and are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, or if you need more help than the dealership could
provide, after following the steps described above, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center to find an authorized dealership to help
you.
In the United States:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952)
www.customersaskford.com
In Canada:
Lincoln Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
1-800-387-9333
www.lincolncanada.com
In order to help you service your Lincoln vehicle, please have the
following information available when contacting the Lincoln Centre:
• Your telephone number (home and business)
• The name of the dealer and the city where the dealership is located
• The year and make of your vehicle
• The date of vehicle purchase
• The current odometer reading
• The vehicle identification number (VIN)
Additional Assistance
If you still have a complaint involving a warranty dispute, you may wish
to contact the Dispute Settlement Board (U.S.).
In some states (in the U.S.) you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt in some states.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
211
In the United States, a warranty dispute must be submitted to the
Dispute Settlement Board before taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by state law, before pursuing
replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws. This
dispute handling procedure is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are independent of the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d) requires that, if a manufacturer
or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the
vehicle’s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of
attempts, the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the
vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable allowance for consumer
use). The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) presumes that the manufacturer
has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within the first 18 months of ownership
of a new vehicle or the first 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non-conformity
likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity (a
defect or condition that substantially impairs the use, value or safety of
the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of
more than 30 calendar days (not necessarily all at one time)
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer must also notify the
manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
THE DISPUTE SETTLEMENT BOARD (U.S. ONLY)
The Dispute Settlement Board is:
• an independent, third-party arbitration program for warranty disputes.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
212
• available free to owners and lessees of qualifying Ford Motor Company
vehicles.
The Dispute Settlement Board may not be available in all states. Ford
Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures and/or to discontinue this service without notice and without
incurring obligations per applicable state law.
What kinds of cases does the Board review?
Unresolved warranty repair concerns or vehicle performance concerns as
on Ford and Lincoln Mercury cars and Ford and Lincoln Mercury light
trucks which are within the terms of any applicable written new vehicle
warranty are eligible for review, except those involving:
• a non-Ford product
• a non-Ford dealership
• sales disputes between customer and dealer except those associated
with warranty repairs or concerns with the vehicle’s performance as
designed
• a request for reimbursement of consequential expenses unless a
service or product concern is being reviewed
• items not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty (including
maintenance and wear items)
• alleged personal injury/property damage claims
• cases currently in litigation
• vehicles not used primarily for family, personal or household purposes
(except in states where the Dispute Settlement Board is required to
review commercial vehicles)
• vehicles with non-U.S. warranties
Concerns are ineligible for review if the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
has expired at receipt of your application and, in certain states eligibility
is dependent upon the customer’s possession of the vehicle.
Eligibility may differ according to state law. For example, see the unique
brochures for California, West Virginia, Georgia and Wisconsin
purchasers/lessees.
Board membership
The Board consists of:
• Three consumer representatives
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
213
• A Ford or Lincoln Mercury dealership representative
Consumer candidates for Board membership are recruited and trained by
an independent consulting firm. The dealership Board member is chosen
from Ford and Lincoln Mercury dealership management, recognized for
their business leadership qualities.
What the Board needs
To have your case reviewed you must complete the application in the
DSB brochure and mail it to the address provided on the application
form. Some states will require you to use certified mail, with return
receipt requested.
Your application is reviewed and, if it is determined to be eligible, you
will receive an acknowledgment indicating:
• The file number assigned to your application.
• The toll-free phone number of the DSB’s independent administrator.
Your dealership and a Ford Motor Company representative will then be
asked to submit statements.
To properly review your case, the Board needs the following information:
• Legible copies of all documents and maintenance or repair orders
relevant to the case.
• The year, make, model, and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) listed
on your vehicle ownership license.
• The date of repair(s) and mileage at the time of occurrence(s).
• The current mileage.
• The name of the dealer(s) who sold or serviced the vehicle.
• A brief description of your unresolved concern.
• A brief summary of the action taken by the dealer(s) and Ford Motor
Company.
• The names (if known) of all the people you contacted at the
dealership(s).
• A description of the action you expect to resolve your concern.
You will receive a letter of explanation if your application does not
qualify for Board review.
Oral presentations
If you would like to make an oral presentation, indicate YES to question
6 on the application. While it is your right to make an oral presentation
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
214
before the Board, this is not a requirement and the Board will decide the
case whether or not an oral presentation is made. An oral presentation
may be requested by the Board as well.
Making a decision
Board members review all available information related to each
complaint, including oral presentations, and arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Board review may be terminated at any time by either party.
Every effort is made to decide the case within 40 days of the date that
all requested information is received by the Board. Since the Board
generally meets once a month, it may take longer for the Board to
consider some cases.
After a case is reviewed, the Board mails you a decision letter and a
form on which to accept or reject the Board’s decision. The decisions of
the Board are binding on Ford (and, in some cases, on the dealer) but
not on consumers who are free to pursue other remedies available to
them under state or federal law.
To request a DSB Brochure/Application
For a brochure/application, speak to your dealer or write/call the Board
at the following address/phone number:
Dispute Settlement Board
P.O. Box 1424
Waukesha, WI 53187–1424
1–800–428–3718
You may also contact the North American Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673 (Ford), TDD for the hearing impaired: 1-800-232-5952
or by writing to the Center at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, Michigan 48121
UTILIZING THE MEDIATION/ARBITRATION PROGRAM
(CANADA ONLY)
In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford and
the dealer to resolve a factory-related vehicle service concern have been
unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
215
The CAMVAP program is a straight-forward and relatively speedy
alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a
settlement have failed. This procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal
proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party arbitrators conduct
hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair, and final; the arbitrator’s
award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685.
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN
You can get more protection for your new car or light truck by
purchasing Ford Extended Service Plan (Ford ESP) coverage. It provides
the following:
• Benefits during the warranty period depending on the plan you
purchase (such as: reimbursement for rentals; coverage for certain
maintenance and wear items).
• Protection against covered repair costs after your Bumper-to-Bumper
Warranty expires.
You may purchase Ford ESP from any participating Ford and Lincoln
Mercury and Ford of Canada dealer. There are several plans available in
various time, distance and deductible combinations which can be tailored
to fit your own driving needs. Ford ESP also offers reimbursement
benefits for towing and rental coverage.
When you buy Ford ESP, you receive Peace-of-Mind protection
throughout the United States and Canada, provided by a network of
more than 5,000 participating Ford or Lincoln Mercury and Ford of
Canada dealers.
If you did not take advantage of the Ford Extended Service Plan at the
time of purchasing your vehicle, you may still be eligible. Since this
information is subject to change, please ask your dealer for complete
details about Ford Extended Service Plan coverage options, or visit the
Ford ESP website at www.ford-esp.com.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
216
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country, contact the
appropriate foreign embassy or consulate. These officials can inform you
of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti-knock
index lower than is recommended for your vehicle, contact a district or
owner relations/customer relationship office.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may
damage the effectiveness of your emission control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford Motor Company/Ford of
Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper
fuel.
In the United States, using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the U.S.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in
Central or South America, the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot help you, write or call:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
WORLDWIDE DIRECT MARKET OPERATIONS
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
FAX: (313) 390-0804
If you are in another foreign country, contact the nearest Ford
dealership. If the dealership employees cannot help you, they can direct
you to the nearest Ford affiliate office.
If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of
the U.S. or Canada, register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and
new address with Ford Motor Company Worldwide Direct Market
Operations.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER’S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio, contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
P.O. Box 07150
Detroit, Michigan 48207
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
217
Or call:
For a free publication catalog, order toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by their website:
www.helminc.com.
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by credit card, check or
money order.)
Obtaining a French owner’s guide
French Owner’s Guides can be obtained from your dealer or by writing to
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a crash
or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and
if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1–800–424–9393 (or 366–0123 in the Washington D.C. area) or write
to:
NHTSA
400 Seventh Street
U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Customer Assistance
218
WASHING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral
Ph shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A), which is available
from your dealer.
• Never use strong household detergents or soap, such as dish washing
or laundry liquid. These products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the touch” or during exposure to
strong, direct sunlight.
• Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for
best results.
• Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to
eliminate water spotting.
• It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the
winter months, as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause
damage to the vehicle.
• Immediately remove items such as gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such as antennas, before entering a
car wash.
• Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted
surface; if these substances come in contact with your vehicle,
wash off as soon as possible.
• If your vehicle is equipped with running boards, do not use
rubber, plastic and vinyl protectant products on the running
board surface, as the area may become slippery.
WAXING
Applying a polymer paint sealant to your vehicle every six months will
assist in reducing minor scratches and paint damage.
• Wash the vehicle first.
• Do not use waxes that contain abrasives.
• Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non-body
(low-gloss black) colored trim, such as grained door handles, roof
racks, bumpers, side moldings, mirror housings or the windshield cowl
area. The paint sealant will “gray” or stain the parts over time.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
Cleaning
219
PAINT CHIPS
Your dealer has touch-up paint and sprays to match your vehicle’s color.
Take your color code (printed on a sticker in the driver’s door jam) to
your dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before using the products.
ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS
Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint
finish. In order to maintain their shine:
• Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A),
which is available from your dealer. Heavy dirt and brake dust
accumulation may require agitation with a sponge. Rinse thoroughly
with a strong stream of water.
• Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or
covers.
• Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your
wheel rims or covers. Chemical-strength cleaners, or cleaning
chemicals, in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust
and dirt, could wear away the clearcoat finish over time.
• Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel
cleaners, steel wool, fuels or strong household detergent.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
(ZC-42), available from your dealer.
ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt
buildup keep the engine warmer than normal. When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. The
high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause
damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the
engine block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20) on all parts
that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running; water in the
running engine may cause internal damage.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
220
• Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning
the engine.
• 5.4L V8/6.8L V10 gasoline engines
PLASTIC (NON-PAINTED) EXTERIOR PARTS
Use only approved products to clean plastic parts. These products are
available from your dealer.
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A).
• If tar or grease spots are present, use Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover (ZC-42).
WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES
The windshield, rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be
cleaned regularly. If the wipers do not wipe properly, substances on the
vehicle’s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause. These may include
hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes, tree sap, or other
organic contamination. To clean these items, please follow these tips:
• The windshield, rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with
a non-abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass
Cleaner (ZC-23), available from your dealer.
• Do not use abrasives, as they may cause scratches.
• Do not use fuel, kerosene, or paint thinner to clean any parts.
• Wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl (rubbing) alcohol or
windshield washer solution. Be sure to replace wiper blades when they
appear worn or do not function properly.
Do not use sharp objects, such as a razor blade, to clean the
inside of the rear window or to remove decals, as it may cause
damage to the rear window defroster’s heated grid lines (if
equipped).
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
221
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CLUSTER LENS
Clean the instrument panel with a damp cloth, then dry with a dry cloth.
• Avoid cleaners or polish that increase the gloss of the upper portion of
the instrument panel. The dull finish in this area helps protect the
driver from undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of
the air bag system.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in
contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan
lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted
surfaces.
INTERIOR TRIM
• Clean the interior trim areas with a damp cloth, then dry by wiping
with a dry, soft, clean cloth.
• Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the
finish.
INTERIOR
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and safety belts:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Extra Strength
Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-41).
• If grease or tar is present on the material, spot-clean the area first
with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14).
• Never saturate the seat covers with cleaning solution.
• Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of
the seat materials.
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
222
LEATHER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
Your leather seating surfaces have a clear, protective coating over the
leather.
• To clean, use a soft cloth with Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl
Cleaner (ZC-11–A). Dry the area with a soft cloth.
• To help maintain its resiliency and color, use the Motorcraft Deluxe
Leather Care Kit (ZC-11–D), available from your authorized dealer.
• Do not use household cleaning products, alcohol solutions, solvents or
cleaners intended for rubber, vinyl and plastics, or oil/petroleum-based
leather conditioners. These products may cause premature wearing of
the clear, protective coating.
Note: In some instances, color or dye transfer can occur when wet
clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery. If this occurs, the
leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining.
UNDERBODY
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently. Keep body and
door drain holes free from packed dirt.
Note: Use care when using a power washer to clean the driveline,
especially the driveshaft and interfacing components. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage.
FORD, LINCOLN AND MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS
Your Ford, Lincoln or Mercury dealer has many quality products available
to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes. These quality products
have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs; they
are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your
vehicle. Each product is made from high quality materials that meet or
exceed rigid specifications. For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Custom Clearcoat Polish (ZC–8–A)
Motorcraft Custom Vinyl Protectant (not available in Canada) (ZC-40–A)
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
223
Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-93)
Motorcraft Vinyl Conditioner (Canada only) (CXC-94)
Motorcraft Deluxe Leather and Vinyl Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-11–A)
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Extra Strength Upholstery Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-41)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner (ZC-37–A)
Motorcraft Dash and Vinyl Cleaner (ZC-38–A)
Motorcraft Car Care Kit (ZC-26)
Motorcraft Premium Car Wash Concentrate (ZC-17-B)
Motorcraft Carlite Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3–A)
Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine (ZC-28)
Motorcraft Triple Clean (ZC-13)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (not available in Canada)
(ZC-23)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (ZC-20)
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Cleaning
224
SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS
To help you service your vehicle:
• We highlight do-it-yourself items in the engine compartment for easy
location.
• We provide a scheduled maintenance guide which makes tracking
routine service easy.
If your vehicle requires professional service, your dealership can provide
the necessary parts and service. Check your Warranty Guide/Owner
Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids and service parts
conforming to specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and built to
provide the best performance in your vehicle.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed
space, unless you are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning (cigarettes) material away
from the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the engine off
1. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the key.
3. Block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
Working with the engine on
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P (Park).
2. Block the wheels.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
Maintenance and Specifications
225
OPENING THE HOOD
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood
release handle located under the
bottom left corner of the instrument
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
release the auxiliary latch located
under the right center of the hood.
Slide the handle to release the
auxiliary latch.
3. Lift the hood until the lift
cylinders hold it open.
IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
5.4L V8/6.8L V10 gasoline engines
Refer to the 6.0 Liter Power Stroke Direct Injection Turbo Diesel
Owner’s Guide Supplement for diesel engine component locations.
HOOD
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
226
1. Battery
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Transmission fluid dipstick
4. Engine oil dipstick
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Underhood relay box
7. Power steering fluid reservoir
8. Air filter assembly
9. Engine coolant reservoir
10. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
WINDSHIELD WASHER FLUID
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the
level is low. In very cold weather, do
not fill the reservoir completely.
Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specification WSB-M8B16–A2.
Refer to Lubricant specifications
in this chapter.
State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the
use of methanol, a common windshield washer antifreeze additive.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
227
Washer fluids containing non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40° F (4.5°C),
use washer fluid with antifreeze protection. Failure to use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident.
Note: Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir. Washer
fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system
components.
Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate
Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the
windshield.
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for checking the engine oil.
1. Make sure the vehicle is on level ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait a few minutes for the oil to drain into the
oil pan.
3. Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P
(Park).
4. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine heat.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
228
5. Locate and carefully remove the
engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
6. Wipe the indicator clean. Insert the indicator fully, then remove it
again.
• If the oil level is between the MIN and MAX marks, the oil level is
acceptable. DO NOT ADD OIL.
• If the oil level is below the MIN
mark, add enough oil to raise the
level within the MIN-MAX range.
• Oil levels above the MAX mark may cause engine damage. Some oil
must be removed from the engine by a service technician.
7. Put the oil level indicator back in and ensure it is fully seated.
Adding engine oil
1. Check the engine oil. For instructions, refer to Checking the engine
oil in this chapter.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the normal range, add only certified
engine oil of the recommended viscosity. Remove the engine oil filler cap
and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
229
3. Recheck the engine oil level. Make sure the oil level is not above the
MAX mark on the engine oil level indicator (dipstick).
4. Install the indicator and ensure it is fully seated.
5. Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise
1/4 of a turn until three clicks are heard or until the cap is fully seated.
To avoid possible oil loss, DO NOT operate the vehicle with the
engine oil level indicator and/or the engine oil filler cap removed.
Engine oil and filter recommendations
Look for this certification
trademark.
Use SAE 5W-20 engine oil.
Only use oils “Certified For Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel
economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee (ISLAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
To protect your engine’s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W-20 or an
equivalent 5W-20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS-M2C930-A. SAE
5W-20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability
performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle’s engine.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine
treatments. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that
is not covered by Ford warranty.
Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule
listed in the scheduled maintenance guide.
Ford production and aftermarket (Motorcraft) oil filters are designed for
added engine protection and long life. If a replacement oil filter is used
that does not meet Ford material and design specifications, start-up
engine noises or knock may be experienced.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
230
It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter (or
another brand meeting Ford specifications) for your engine application.
BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require
additional water during its life of
service.
However, for severe usage or in high temperature climates, check the
battery electrolyte level. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for
the service interval schedules.
Keep the electrolyte level in each cell up to the “level indicator”.
Do not overfill the battery cells.
If the electrolyte level in the battery is low, you can add plain tap water
to the battery, as long as you do not use hard water (water with a high
mineral or alkali content). If possible, however, try to only fill the battery
cells with distilled water. If the battery needs water often, have the
charging system checked.
If your battery has a cover/shield, make sure it is reinstalled
after the battery has been cleaned or replaced.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the top of the battery clean and
dry. Also, make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to
the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals, remove the cables
from the terminals and clean with a wire brush. You can neutralize the
acid with a solution of baking soda and water.
When the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed, the
transmission must learn its adaptive strategy. As a result of this, the
transmission may shift firmly. This operation is considered normal and
will fully update transmission operation to its optimum shift feel.
Note: Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to
the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect
battery performance and durability.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
231
Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or lighted
substances to come near the battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure on the
end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps,
resulting in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
Keep batteries out of reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield your eyes
when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of
acid solution. In case of acid contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
For information on transmission operation after the battery has been
disconnected, refer to Shift strategy in the Driving chapter.
Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically controlled by a computer,
some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery. When
the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed, the engine must
relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and
performance. To begin this process:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop, set the parking brake.
2. Put the gearshift in P (Park), turn off all accessories and start the
engine.
3. Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature.
4. Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
5. Turn the A/C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute.
6. Release the parking brake. With your foot on the brake pedal and with
the A/C on, put the vehicle in D (Drive) and allow the engine to idle for
at least one minute.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
232
7. Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process.
• The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles (16 km) or more to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy.
• If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim, the idle
quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle
trim is eventually relearned.
If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed,
the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is
reconnected.
• Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner.
Follow your local authorized
standards for disposal. Call your
local authorized recycling center
to find out more about recycling
automotive batteries.
ENGINE COOLANT
Checking engine coolant
The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the
mileage intervals listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide. The
coolant concentration should be maintained at 50/50 coolant and distilled
water, which equates to a freeze point of -34°F (-36°C). Coolant
concentration testing is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester
(such as the Rotunda Battery and Antifreeze Tester, 014–R1060). The
level of coolant should be maintained at the “FULL COLD” level or
within the “COLD FILL RANGE” in the coolant reservoir. If the level falls
below, add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant
section.
Your vehicle was factory-filled with a 50/50 engine coolant and water
concentration. If the concentration of coolant falls below 40% or above
60%, the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly. A
50–50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following:
• Freeze protection down to -34°F (-36°C).
• Boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion.
LEAD
RETURN
RECYCLE
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
233
• Enables calibrated gauges to work properly.
When the engine is cold, check the
level of the engine coolant in the
reservoir.
• The engine coolant should be at the “FULL COLD” level or within the
“COLD FILL RANGE” as listed on the engine coolant reservoir
(depending upon application).
• Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for service interval
schedules.
• Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your
vehicle in this chapter.
If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval,
the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty. If the reservoir is
low or empty, add engine coolant to the reservoir. Refer to Adding
engine coolant in this chapter.
Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable; do not use engine
coolant, antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified
function and vehicle location.
Adding engine coolant
When adding coolant, make sure it is a 50/50 mixture of engine coolant
and distilled water. Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir, when the
engine is cool, until the appropriate fill level is obtained.
Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot. Steam and
scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you
badly. Also, you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts.
COLD FILL
RANGE
MAX
MIN
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
234
Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid
container. If sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant could
make it difficult to see through the windshield.
• Add Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored), VC-7–A (U.S., except CA and OR), VC-7–B
(CA and OR only), meeting Ford Specification
WSS-M97B51–A1.
Note: Use of Motorcraft Cooling System Stop Leak Pellets, VC-6, may
darken the color of Motorcraft Premium Gold Engine Coolant from
yellow to golden tan.
• Do not add/mix an orange-colored, extended life coolant such
as Motorcraft Speciality Orange Engine Coolant, VC-2 (US) or
CXC-209 (Canada), meeting Ford specification WSS-M97B44–D
with the factory-filled coolant. Mixing Motorcraft Speciality Orange
Engine Coolant or any orange-colored extended life product with your
factory filled coolant can result in degraded corrosion protection.
• A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added, in case
of emergency, to reach a vehicle service location. In this instance, the
cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50/50 mixture of
engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or any engine coolants
mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Alcohol
and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant. These
can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine
coolant.
For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non-pressurized cap
on the coolant recovery system, add coolant to the coolant recovery
reservoir when the engine is cool. Add the proper mixture of coolant and
water to the “FULL COLD” level. For all other vehicles which have a
coolant degas system with a pressurized cap, or if it is necessary to
remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with
an overflow system, follow these steps to add engine coolant.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
235
To reduce the risk of personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap. The
cooling system is under pressure; steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly.
1. Before you begin, turn the engine off and let it cool.
2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick cloth around the coolant
pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir (a translucent plastic bottle).
Slowly turn cap counterclockwise (left) until pressure begins to release.
3. Step back while the pressure releases.
4. When you are sure that all the pressure has been released, use the
cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap.
5. Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture (see
above), to within the “COLD FILL RANGE” or the “FULL COLD” level on
the reservoir. If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system, fill
the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full.
6. Replace the cap. Turn until tightly installed. (Cap must be tightly
installed to prevent coolant loss.)
After any coolant has been added, check the coolant concentration (refer
to Checking engine coolant). If the concentration is not 50/50
(protection to –34° F/–36° C), drain some coolant and adjust the
concentration. It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50/50
coolant concentration.
Whenever coolant has been added, the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle. If
necessary, add enough 50/50 concentration of engine coolant and
distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level.
If you have to add more than 1.0 quart (1.0 liter) of engine coolant per
month, have your dealer check the engine cooling system. Your cooling
system may have a leak. Operating an engine with a low level of coolant
can result in engine overheating and possible engine damage.
Recycled engine coolant
Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant in vehicles originally equipped with Motorcraft Premium Gold
Engine Coolant since a Ford-approved recycling process is not yet
available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate
manner. Follow your community’s regulations and standards for recycling
and disposing of automotive fluids.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
236
Coolant refill capacity
To find out how much fluid your vehicle’s cooling system can hold, refer
to Refill capacities in this section.
Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant
in this section.
Severe climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates (less than –34° F[–36° C ]):
• It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration
above 50%.
• NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60%.
• Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the
winter months.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration
above 40%.
• NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40%.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40% will
decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
• Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the
coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate
protection at the temperatures in which you drive.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme climates should use a 50/50
mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system
and engine protection.
What you should know about fail-safe cooling (if equipped)
If the engine coolant supply is depleted, this feature allows the vehicle to
be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred.
The “fail-safe” distance depends on ambient temperatures, vehicle load
and terrain.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
237
How fail-safe cooling works
If the engine begins to overheat:
• The engine coolant temperature
gauge will move to the red (hot)
area.
• The
and symbol will
illuminate.
• The Service engine soon
indicator light will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine will automatically switch to
alternating cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an air
pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be disabled.
Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine
will completely shut down, causing steering and braking effort to
increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the engine can be re-started. Take
your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine
damage.
When fail-safe mode is activated
You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode, so drive the
vehicle with caution. The vehicle will not be able to maintain high-speed
operation and the engine will run rough. Remember that the engine is
capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish if low.
Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is
running or hot.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
238
5. Re-start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility.
Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem
increases the chance of engine damage. Take your vehicle to a
service facility as soon as possible.
WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS
Important safety precautions
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank
may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.
Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials
and any open flames before
fueling your vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
fueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful
or fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
239
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind
can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If fuel is splashed in the eyes,
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention. Failure to seek proper medical attention could
lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin. If fuel is
splashed on the skin and/or clothing, promptly remove contaminated
clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water. Repeated or
prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking “Antabuse” or other forms of
disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing gasoline vapors,
or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction. In sensitive
individuals, serious personal injury or sickness may result. If fuel is
splashed on the skin, promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse
reaction.
When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow
sparks or open flames near the filler neck. Never smoke while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions.
Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity, which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an
ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid static build-up when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the ground.
• DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle (including the
cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while
filling.
• DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill
position.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
240
Fuel Filler Cap
Your fuel tank filler cap has an indexed design with a 1/8 turn on/off
feature.
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Carefully turn the filler cap counterclockwise 1/8 of a turn until it
stops.
3. Pull to remove the cap from the fuel filler pipe.
4. To install the cap, align the tabs on the cap with the notches on the
filler pipe.
5. Turn the filler cap clockwise 1/8 of a turn until it stops.
If the “Service Engine Soon/Check Engine” indicator comes on and stays
on after you start the engine, the fuel filler cap may not be properly
installed. Turn off the engine, remove the fuel filler cap, align the cap
properly and reinstall it.
If you must replace the fuel filler cap, replace it with a fuel filler
cap that is designed for your vehicle. The customer warranty may
be void for any damage to the fuel tank or fuel system if the
correct genuine Ford or Motorcraft fuel filler cap is not used.
The fuel system may be under pressure. If the fuel filler cap is
venting vapor or if you hear a hissing sound, wait until it stops
before completely removing the fuel filler cap. Otherwise, fuel may
spray out and injure you or others.
If you do not use the proper fuel filler cap, excessive pressure or
vacuum in the fuel tank may damage the fuel system or cause
the fuel cap to disengage in a collision, which may result in possible
personal injury.
Choosing the right fuel
Use only UNLEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law
and could damage your vehicle.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic
compounds, including manganese-based additives. Studies indicate that
these additives can cause your vehicle’s emission control system to
deteriorate more rapidly. In Canada, premium grade fuel generally
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
241
contains more metallic additives than regular fuel. We recommend using
regular grade fuel. In Canada, many fuels contain metallic additives, but
fuels free of such additives may be available; check with your local fuel
dealer.
Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can damage critical fuel system
components.
Repairs to correct the effects of using a fuel for which your vehicle was
not designed may not be covered by your warranty.
Octane recommendations
Your vehicle is designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline with
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
We do not recommend the use of
gasolines labeled as “Regular” that
are sold with octane ratings of 86 or lower in high altitude areas.
Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. However, if
it knocks heavily under most driving conditions while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician to prevent any engine damage.
Fuel quality
If you are experiencing starting, rough idle or hesitation driveability
problems, try a different brand of unleaded gasoline. “Premium”
unleaded gasoline is not recommended for vehicles designed to use
“Regular” unleaded gasoline because it may cause these problems to
become more pronounced. If the problems persist, see your dealer or a
qualified service technician.
It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel
tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane
rating. Aftermarket products could cause damage to the fuel system.
Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your
fuel may not be covered by your warranty.
Many of the world’s automakers approved the World-wide Fuel Charter
that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved
performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle.
Gasolines that meet the World-wide Fuel Charter should be used when
available. Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the
World-wide Fuel Charter.
87
(R+M)/2 METHOD
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
242
Cleaner air
Ford endorses the use of reformulated “cleaner-burning” gasolines to
improve air quality.
Running out of fuel
Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse
affect on powertrain components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• You may need to cycle the ignition from OFF to ON several times after
refueling, to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to
the engine.
• Your Service engine soon indicator may come on. For more
information on the Service engine soon indicator, refer to the
Instrument cluster chapter.
Fuel Filter
For fuel filter replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate
intervals for changing the fuel filter.
Replace the fuel filter with an authorized Motorcraft part. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the fuel system
if an authorized Motorcraft fuel filter is not used.
ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY
Measuring techniques
Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you, the
driver. You must gather information as accurately and consistently as
possible. Fuel expense, frequency of fill-ups or fuel gauge readings are
NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy. We do not recommend taking
fuel economy measurements during the first 1,000 miles (1,600 km) of
driving (engine break-in period). You will get a more accurate
measurement after 2,000 miles-3,000 miles (3,000 km–5,000 km).
Filling the tank
The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to
the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Refill capacities
section of this chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
243
The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the
empty reserve combined. Indicated capacity is the difference in the
amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates
empty. Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty.
The amount of usable fuel in the empty reserve varies and should
not be relied upon to increase driving range. When refueling your
vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the
fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank.
For consistent results when filling the fuel tank:
• Turn the engine/ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling,
an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running.
• Use the same filling rate setting (low — medium — high) each time
the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than 2 automatic click-offs when filling.
• Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating.
• Use a known quality gasoline, preferably a national brand.
• Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the
same direction each time you fill up.
• Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time.
Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent.
Calculating fuel economy
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading
(in miles or kilometers).
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the amount of fuel added (in
gallons or liters).
3. After at least three to five tank fill-ups, fill the fuel tank and record
the current odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer
reading.
5. Follow one of the simple calculations in order to determine fuel
economy:
Calculation 1: Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used.
Calculation 2: Multiply liters used by 100, then divide by total
kilometers traveled.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
244
Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving (city
or highway). This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel
economy under current driving conditions. Additionally, keeping records
during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel
economy. In general, lower temperatures give lower fuel economy.
Driving style — good driving and fuel economy habits
Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change
a number of variables and improve your fuel economy.
Habits
• Smooth, moderate operation can yield up to 10% savings in fuel.
• Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel
economy.
• Idling for long periods of time (greater than one minute) may waste
fuel.
• Anticipate stopping; slowing down may eliminate the need to stop.
• Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy.
• Slow down gradually.
• Driving at reasonable speeds (traveling at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15%
less fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105 km/h]).
• Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy.
• Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy.
• You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if
unnecessary shifting between third and fourth gear occurs.
Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel
economy.
• Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may
reduce fuel economy.
• Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel
economy.
• Combine errands and minimize stop-and-go driving.
Maintenance
• Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size.
• Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel
economy.
• Use recommended engine oil. Refer to Lubricant specifications in
this chapter.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
245
• Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items. Follow the
recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks
found in your vehicle scheduled maintenance guide.
Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy
at any speed.
• Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy (approximately
1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is lost for every 400 lb [180 kg] of weight carried).
• Adding certain accessories to your vehicle (for example bug
deflectors, rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski/luggage racks) may
reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first
8–10 miles (12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to
driving on hilly terrain.
• Transmissions give their best fuel economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal.
• Four-wheel-drive operation (if equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
• Close windows for high speed driving.
EPA window sticker
Every new vehicle should have the EPA window sticker. Contact your
dealer if the window sticker is not supplied with your vehicle. The EPA
window sticker should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons
with other vehicles.
It is important to note the box in the lower left corner of the window
sticker. These numbers represent the Range of MPG (L/100 km)
expected on the vehicle under optimum conditions. Your fuel economy
may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
246
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a
catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards. To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving, especially at
high speeds.
• Have the items listed in your Scheduled Maintenance Guide
performed according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the Scheduled Maintenance
Guide are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its
emissions system.
If other than Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for
maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting
emission control, such non-Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine
Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability.
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can start a fire.
Illumination of the Service engine soon light, charging system warning
light or the temperature warning light, fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke
or loss of engine power, could indicate that the emission control system
is not working properly.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially
lethal fumes into the passenger compartment.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine. By law,
vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures, repairs, services, sells,
leases, trades vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to
intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working.
Information about your vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine. This
decal identifies engine displacement and gives some tune up specifications.
Please consult your Warranty Guide for complete emission warranty
information.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
247
On board diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine’s
emission control system. This system is commonly known as the On
Board Diagnostics System (OBD-II). This OBD-II system protects the
environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet
government emission standards. The OBD-II system also assists the
service technician in properly servicing your vehicle. When the Check
engine/Service engine soon light illuminates, the OBD-II system has
detected a malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may cause your Check
engine/Service engine soon light to illuminate. Examples are:
1. The vehicle has run out of fuel. (The engine may misfire or run
poorly.)
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel.
3. The fuel cap may not have been securely tightened.
These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank
with good quality fuel and/or properly tightening the fuel cap. After three
driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the Check engine/Service engine soon light should turn off. (A
driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving.) No additional vehicle service is required.
If the Check engine/Service engine soon light remains on, have your
vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity.
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an I/M test of
the on-board diagnostics system. If your Check engine/Service engine
soon light is on, refer to the description in the Warning lights and
chimes section of the Instrument Cluster chapter. Your vehicle may not
pass the I/M test with the Check engine/Service engine soon light on.
If the vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has just been serviced,
the on-board diagnostics system is reset to a “not ready for I/M test”
condition. To ready the on-board diagnostics system for I/M testing, a
minimum of 30 minutes of city and highway driving is necessary as
described below:
• First, at least 10 minutes of driving on an expressway or highway.
• Next, at least 20 minutes driving in stop-and-go, city-type traffic with
at least four idle periods.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
248
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the
engine. Then, start the engine and complete the above driving cycle. The
engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Once started,
do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete.
CHECKING AND ADDING POWER STEERING FLUID
Check the power steering fluid.
Refer to the scheduled maintenance
guide for the service interval
schedules. If adding fluid is
necessary, use only MERCON威 ATF.
Check the fluid level when it is at ambient temperature, 20°–80° F (-7°
– 25° C):
1. Check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be between the arrows
in the FULL COLD range. Do not add fluid if the level is within this
range.
2. If the fluid level is low. Add fluid to bring fluid level up to be between
the arrows in the FULL COLD range.
3. Start the engine.
4. While the engine idles, turn the steering wheel left and right several
times.
5. Turn the engine off.
6. Recheck the fluid level on the dipstick. Do not add fluid if the level is
between the arrows in the FULL COLD range.
7. If the fluid is low, add fluid in small amounts, continuously checking
the level until it reaches the FULL COLD range. Be sure to put the
dipstick back in the reservoir.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
249
BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR
The fluid level will drop slowly as
the brakes wear, and will rise when
the brake components are replaced.
Fluid levels below the “MAX” line
that do not trigger the brake system
warning lamp are within the normal
operating range, there is no need to
add fluid. If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range,
the performance of your brake system could be compromised, seek
service from your dealer immediately.
TRANSMISSION FLUID
Checking automatic transmission fluid (if equipped)
Refer to your Scheduled Maintenance Guide for scheduled intervals for
fluid checks and changes. Your transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly, i.e., if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed. To obtain an
accurate fluid check, drive the vehicle until it is at normal operating
temperature (approximately 30 km [20 miles]). If your vehicle has been
operated for an extended period at high speeds, in city traffic during hot
weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be turned off for about 30
minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking.
1. Drive the vehicle 30 km (20 miles) or until it reaches normal operating
temperature.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal,
start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear
ranges. Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage.
4. Latch the gearshift lever in P (Park) and leave the engine running.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with a clean, dry lint free rag. If
necessary, refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment
in this chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level. The fluid should be in
the designated area for normal operating temperature or ambient
temperature.
MAX
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
250
Low fluid level
Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid
level is at the bottom of the dipstick
and the ambient temperature is
above 10°C (50°F).
Correct fluid level
The transmission fluid should be
checked at normal operating
temperature 66°C-77°C
(150°F-170°F) on a level surface. The normal operating temperature can
be reached after approximately 30 km (20 miles) of driving.
You can check the fluid without driving if the ambient temperature is
above 10°C (50°F). However, if fluid is added at this time, an overfill
condition could result when the vehicle reaches normal operating
temperature.
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at normal operating
temperature (66°C-77°C
[150°F-170°F]).
The transmission fluid should be in
this range if at ambient temperature
(10°C-35°C [50°F-95°F]).
High fluid level
Fluid levels above the safe range
may result in transmission failure.
An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift and/or
engagement concerns and/or
possible damage.
High fluid levels can be caused by
an overheating condition.
Adjusting automatic
transmission fluid levels
Before adding any fluid, make sure the correct type is used. The type of
fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the
Lubricant specifications section in this chapter.
Use of a non-approved automatic transmission fluid may cause
internal transmission component damage.
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
251
If necessary, add fluid in 250 ml (1/2 pint) increments through the filler
tube until the level is correct.
If an overfill occurs, excess fluid
should be removed by a qualified
technician.
An overfill condition of
transmission fluid may cause
shift and/or engagement
concerns and/or possible
damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives, treatments or
cleaning agents. The use of these materials may affect transmission
operation and result in damage to internal transmission components.
Automatic transmission fluid filter (if equipped)
The TorqShift automatic
transmission is equipped with a
serviceable external fluid filter
mounted on the frame rail. Refer to
the Scheduled Maintenance Guide
for service intervals.
To replace the transmission filter:
1. Shut off the engine.
2. Unscrew filter housing.
3. Replace filter with a new authorized Motorcraft filter element. Refer to
the Motorcraft part numbers chart in this chapter.
DON'T ADD IF IN CROSSHATCHED AREA • CHECK WHEN HOT IDLING IN PARK
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
252
4. Reinstall housing and check transmission fluid level using procedure in
this section.
Checking and adding transfer case fluid (if equipped)
1. Clean the filler plug.
2. Remove the filler plug and
inspect the fluid level.
3. Add only enough fluid through
the filler opening so that the fluid
level is at the bottom of the
opening.
Use only fluid that meets Ford specifications. Refer to Lubricant
specifications in this chapter.
AIR FILTER MAINTENANCE
Refer to the scheduled maintenance guide for the appropriate intervals
for changing the air filter element.
When changing the air filter element, use only the Motorcraft air filter
element listed. Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter.
Note: Do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not
remove it while the engine is running.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
253
Changing the air filter element
1. Loosen the clamp that secures
the air filter element in place.
2. Carefully separate the two halves
of the air filter housing.
3. Remove the air filter element
from the open end of the air filter
housing.
4. Install a new air filter element, ensuring the arrow on the top half of
the air filter housing lines up with the notch on the bottom half of air
filter housing. Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between
the air filter housing. This could cause filter damage and allow
unmetered air to enter the engine if not properly seated.
5. Replace the two halves of the air filter housing and secure the clamp.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
254
MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS
Component 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine
Air filter element
1
FA-1634 FA-1634
Fuel filter FG-986B FG-986B
Oil filter FL-820-S FL-820-S
PCV valve
2
Battery BXT-65-750 BXT-65-750
Spark plugs
3
Automatic Transmission
Filter
4
——
1
Always use the authorized Motorcraft air filter listed. Failure to use
the correct air filter may result in severe engine damage.
2
The PCV valve is a critical emission component. It is one of the items
listed in the Scheduled Maintenance Guide and is essential to the life
and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system.
For PCV valve replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the
appropriate intervals for changing the PCV valve.
Replace the PCV valve with one that meets Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as a Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement part. The customer warranty may be void
for any damage to the emissions system if such a PCV valve is not
used.
3
For spark plug replacement, see your dealer or a qualified service
technician. Refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide for the
appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs.
Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and
design specifications for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or
equivalent replacement parts. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not
used.
4
Only available with 6.0L Diesel engine/TorqShift transmission. Part
number is FT-145.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
255
REFILL CAPACITIES
Fluid
Ford Part
Name
Application Capacity
Front axle Motorcraft SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
4X4 vehicles 1.8L (3.6 pints)
Rear axle
1
Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
All 3.3L (6.9 pints)
2
Brake fluid Motorcraft High
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
All Fill to line on
reservoir
Engine coolant-
Gasoline engines
3
Motorcraft
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
5.4L V8 engine 25L (26.4
quarts)
4
6.8L V10 engine 26.0L (27.5
quarts)
4
Engine
coolant-Diesel
engine
Refer to your 6.0L Diesel Supplement
Engine oil
(includes filter
change)-Gasoline
engines
7
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
5.4L V8/6.8L
V10 engine
5.7L (6.0
quarts)
Engine oil
(includes filter
change)-Diesel
engine
Refer to your 6.0L Diesel Supplement
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
256
Fluid
Ford Part
Name
Application Capacity
Fuel tank N/A All 166.6L (44.0
gallons)
Power steering
fluid
Motorcraft
MERCON威 ATF
All Fill to FULL
COLD range on
dipstick
Transfer case
fluid (if
equipped)
Motorcraft
MERCON威 ATF
4x4 vehicles 1.9L (2.0
quarts)
Transmission
fluid
5
Motorcraft
MERCON威 ATF
4x2 4R100
(4–speed)
16.1L (17.1
quarts)
6
4x4 4R100
(4–speed)
16.7L (17.7
quarts)
6
Motorcraft
MERCON威 SP
ATF
4x2/4x4
TorqShift
(5–speed) –
includes remote
filter element
change
16.6L (17.5
qts)
6
Windshield
washer fluid
Motorcraft
Premium
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
All 4.2L (1.1
gallons)
1
Your vehicle’s rear axle is filled with a synthetic lubricant. Axle lubricant
quantities should not need to be checked unless a leak is suspected,
service is required or the axle assembly has been submerged in water.
The axle lubricant should be changed any time the rear axle has been
submerged in water.
Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle to the
bottom of the filler hole with the specified lubricant.
2
Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL—3 or equivalent
meeting Ford Specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of limited
slip axles.
Service refill capacities are determined by filling the rear axle to the
bottom of the filler hole with the specified lubricant.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
257
3
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
4
If equipped with auxiliary rear heater, add an additional 1.4 L (1.5
quarts).
5
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the end of the dipstick. Check the
container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to
your Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine the correct service
interval.
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as
MERCON威 and MERCON威 V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON威 type
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that
require the MERCON威 V type fluid.
MERCON威, MERCON威 V and MERCON威 SP are not
interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON威, MERCON威 V and
MERCON威 SP. Use of dual usage fluids in an automatic
transmission application requiring MERCON威 SP may cause
transmission damage. Use of a transmission fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
6
Indicates only approximate dry-fill capacity. Some applications may vary
based on cooler size and if equipped with an in-tank cooler. The amount
of transmission fluid and fluid level should be set by the indication on
the dipstick’s normal operating range.
7
Use of synthetic or synthetic blend motor oil is not mandatory. Engine
oil need only meet the requirements of Ford specification
WSS-M2C930-A and the API Certification mark.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
258
LUBRICANT SPECIFICATIONS
Item
Ford part
name or
equivalent
Ford part
number
Ford
specification
Spindle bearing
High
Temperature
4X4 Front Axle
and Wheel
Bearing Grease
E8TZ-19590–A ESA-M1C198–A
Front axle Motorcraft SAE
80W-90
Premium Rear
Axle Lubricant
XY-80W-90–QL WSP-M2C197–A
Rear axle Motorcraft SAE
75W-140
Synthetic Rear
Axle Lubricant
(10.5 inch)
1
XY-75W140–QL WSL-M2C192-A
Brake fluid Motorcraft High
Performance
DOT 3 Motor
Vehicle Brake
Fluid
PM-1 ESA-M6C25-A
and DOT 3
Engine
coolant-Gasoline
engines
Motorcraft
Premium Gold
Engine Coolant
(yellow-colored)
VC-7-A (U.S.,
except CA and
OR), VC-7-B (CA
and OR only)
WSS-M97B51-A1
Engine
coolant-Diesel
engine
Refer to your 6.0L Diesel Supplement
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
259
Item
Ford part
name or
equivalent
Ford part
number
Ford
specification
Engine
oil-Gasoline
engines
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend
Motor Oil (US)
Motorcraft SAE
5W-20 Super
Premium Motor
Oil (Canada)
XO-5W20-QSP
CXO-5W20–LSP12
(Canada)
WSS-M2C930-A
and API
Certification
Mark
Engine
oil-Diesel engine
Refer to your 6.0L Diesel Supplement
Hinges, latches,
striker plates,
fuel filler door
hinge and seat
tracks
Multi-Purpose
Grease
XG-4 or XL-5 ESR-M1C159-A
or
ESB-M1C93-B
Transmission
/steering/parking
brake linkages
and pivots,
brake pedal
shaft
Premium
Long-Life
Grease
XG-1-C or XG-1-K ESA-M1C75-B
Power steering
fluid and
transfer case
fluid (if
equipped)
Motorcraft
MERCON威 ATF
XT-2-QDX MERCON威
Automatic
transmission
4R100
(4–speed)
Motorcraft
MERCON威 ATF
2
XT-2-QDX MERCON威
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
260
Item
Ford part
name or
equivalent
Ford part
number
Ford
specification
Automatic
transmission
TorqShift
(5–speed)
Motorcraft
MERCON威 SP
ATF
2
XT-6–QSP WSS-M2C919–D
MERCON威 SP
Windshield
washer fluid
Motorcraft
Premium
Windshield
Washer
Concentrate
ZC-32–A WSB-M8B16–A2
1
Add 236 ml (8 oz.) of Additive Friction Modifier XL-3 or equivalent
meeting Ford specification EST-M2C118-A for complete refill of limited
slip axles. Ford design rear axles contain a synthetic lubricant that does
not require changing unless the axle has been submerged in water.
2
Ensure the correct automatic transmission fluid is used. Transmission
fluid requirements are indicated on the end of the dipstick. Check the
container to verify the fluid being added is of the correct type. Refer to
your Scheduled Maintenance Guide to determine the correct service
interval.
Some transmission fluids may be labeled as dual usage, such as
MERCON威 and MERCON威 V. These dual usage fluids are not to be used
in an automatic transmission that requires use of the MERCON威 type
fluid. However, these dual usage fluids may be used in transmissions that
require the MERCON威 V type fluid.
MERCON威, MERCON威 V and MERCON威 SP are not
interchangeable. DO NOT mix MERCON威, MERCON威 V and
MERCON威 SP. Use of dual usage fluids in an automatic
transmission application requiring MERCON威 SP may cause
transmission damage. Use of a transmission fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
261
ENGINE DATA
Engine 5.4L V8 engine 6.8L V10 engine
Cubic inches 330 415
Required fuel 87 octane 87 octane
Firing order 1-3-7-2-6-5-4-8 1-6-5-10-2-7-3-8-4-9
Spark plug gap
1.32–1.42mm
(0.052–0.056 inch)
1.32–1.42mm
(0.052–0.056 inch)
Ignition system Coil on plug Coil on plug
Compression ratio 9.0:1 9.0:1
VEHICLE DIMENSIONS
EXCURSION
Dimension 4x2 – inches (mm) 4x4 – inches (mm)
(1) Overall length 226.7 (5759) 226.7 (5759)
(2) Overall width 79.9 (2031) 79.9 (2031)
(3) Overall height 77.4 (1967) 80.4 (2043)
(4) Wheelbase 137.0 (3480) 137.0 (3480)
(5) Track (Front /
Rear)
68.8 (1746)/
68.1 (1729)
68.8 (1746)/
68.1 (1729)
4
1
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
262
IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE
Certification label
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require
that a Certification label be affixed
to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Certification label may be located.
The Certification label is located on
the structure by the trailing edge of
the driver’s door or the edge of the
driver’s door.
5
2
3
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
263
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number is
attached to a metal tag and is
located on the driver side
instrument panel. (Please note that
in the graphic XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.)
1. World manufacturer identifier
2. Brake type and gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR)
3. Vehicle line, series, body type
4. Engine type
5. Check digit
6. Model year
7. Assembly plant
8. Production sequence number
Engine number
The engine number (the last eight numbers of the vehicle identification
number) is stamped on the engine block, transmission, frame and
transfer case (if equipped).
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Maintenance and Specifications
264
GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE
A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle
through your local authorized Ford or Ford of Canada dealer. These quality
accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive
needs; they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic
appearance of your vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from high
quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford’s rigorous engineering and
safety specifications. Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any
properly dealer-installed Genuine Ford Accessory found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the defective accessory. The accessory
will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12,000 miles (20,000 km) (whichever occurs first), or
• the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty.
This means that Genuine Ford Accessories purchased along with your new
vehicle and installed by the dealer are covered for the full length of your
New Vehicle’s Limited Warranty — 3 years or 36,000 miles (60,000 km)
(whichever occurs first). Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the
warranty.
Not all accessories are available for all models.
The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessory products for
your vehicle. Not all accessories are available for all models. For a
complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle,
please contact your dealer or visit our online store at:
www.fordaccessoriesstore.com.
Exterior style
Bug shields
Deflectors
Fender flares
Front end covers
Grille inserts
Headlamps, fog lights and Daytime Running Lamps (DRLs)
Running boards
Splash guards
Step Bars
Wheels
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Accessories
Accessories
265
Interior style
Electrochromatic compass/temperature interior mirrors
Floor mats
Leather wrapped steering wheels
Scuff plates
Lifestyle
Bike racks
Cargo organization and management
Rear seat entertainment systems
Towing mirrors
Trailer hitches, wiring harnesses and accessories
Peace of mind
First aid and highway safety kits
Full vehicle covers
Locking gas cap
Navigation systems
Remote start
Vehicle security systems
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the following information in
mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment, passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of
the front or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety
Compliance Certification label). Consult your dealer for specific weight
information.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Accessories
266
• The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems — such as two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms - that are equipped with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC
regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service
technician.
• Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your
vehicle, particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive
use.
• To avoid interference with other vehicle functions, such as anti-lock
braking systems, amateur radio users who install radios and antennas
onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in
the area of the driver’s side hood.
• Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are
non-Genuine Ford Accessories added to the vehicle by the dealer or
the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability.
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Accessories
267
A
Accessory delay ..........................66
Air bag supplemental restraint
system ........................................117
and child safety seats ............119
description ..............................117
disposal ....................................121
driver air bag ..........................119
indicator light .........................121
operation .................................119
passenger air bag ...................119
Air cleaner filter ...............253–255
Air conditioning ..........................45
Antifreeze
(see Engine coolant) ................233
Anti-lock brake system
(see Brakes) ......................172–173
Audio system (see Radio) ...17, 21
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic
overdrive .........................177, 179
fluid, adding ............................250
fluid, checking ........................250
fluid, refill capacities ..............256
fluid, specification ..................262
Auxiliary power point .................64
Axle
lubricant specifications ..259, 262
refill capacities ........................256
traction lok ..............................175
B
Battery .......................................231
acid, treating emergencies .....231
jumping a disabled battery ....204
maintenance-free ....................231
replacement, specifications ...255
servicing ..................................231
BeltMinder .................................112
Brakes ........................................172
anti-lock ...........................172–173
anti-lock brake system (ABS)
warning light ...........................172
fluid, checking and adding ....250
fluid, refill capacities ..............256
fluid, specifications .........259, 262
lubricant specifications ..259, 262
parking ....................................173
shift interlock ..........................176
Break-in period .............................5
Bulbs ............................................54
C
Capacities for refilling fluids ....256
Cargo net .....................................82
Cell phone use ............................81
Certification Label ....................263
Changing a tire .........................140
Child safety restraints ..............122
child safety belts ....................122
Child safety seats ......................124
attaching with tether straps ..128
in front seat ............................126
in rear seat ..............................126
Cleaning your vehicle
engine compartment ..............220
instrument panel ....................222
interior .....................................222
interior trim ............................222
plastic parts ............................221
safety belts ..............................222
washing ....................................219
waxing .....................................219
wheels ......................................220
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
Index
268
wiper blades ............................221
Climate control (see Air
conditioning or Heating) ......45, 47
Clock adjust
6-CD in dash .............................23
AM/FM/Tape/CD .......................19
Compass, electronic ....................75
calibration .................................76
set zone adjustment .................76
Console ........................................81
overhead ..............................62–63
Controls
power seat .................................99
steering column ........................73
Coolant
checking and adding ..............233
refill capacities ................237, 256
specifications ..................259, 262
Cruise control
(see Speed control) ....................70
Customer Assistance ................196
Ford accessories for your
vehicle .....................................223
Ford Extended Service
Plan ..........................................216
Getting assistance outside the
U.S. and Canada .....................217
Getting roadside assistance ...196
Getting the service you
need .........................................210
Ordering additional owner’s
literature .................................217
The Dispute Settlement
Board .......................................212
Utilizing the
Mediation/Arbitration
Program ...................................215
D
Daytime running lamps
(see Lamps) ................................50
Dipstick
automatic transmission fluid .250
engine oil .................................228
Doors
lubricant specifications ..........259
Driving under special
conditions ..................182, 189, 192
sand .........................................191
snow and ice ...........................193
through water .................191, 195
E
Emergencies, roadside
jump-starting ..........................204
Emergency Flashers .................197
Emission control system ..........247
Engine ........................................262
cleaning ...................................220
coolant .....................................233
diesel ...........................................6
fail-safe coolant ......................237
idle speed control ...................231
lubrication
specifications ..................259, 262
refill capacities ........................256
service points ..........................226
starting after a collision .........197
Engine block heater .................171
Engine oil ..................................228
checking and adding ..............228
dipstick ....................................228
filter, specifications ........230, 255
recommendations ...................230
refill capacities ........................256
specifications ..................259, 262
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
269
Exhaust fumes ..........................171
F
Fail safe cooling ........................237
Fluid capacities .........................256
Foglamps .....................................50
Four-Wheel Drive vehicles .......184
description ..............................185
driving off road .......................187
electronic shift ................184–185
indicator light .........................185
preparing to drive your
vehicle .....................................175
Fuel ............................................239
calculating fuel economy .......243
cap ...........................................241
capacity ...................................256
choosing the right fuel ...........241
comparisons with EPA fuel
economy estimates .................246
detergent in fuel .....................243
filling your vehicle with
fuel ...........................239, 241, 243
filter, specifications ........243, 255
fuel pump shut-off switch .....197
improving fuel economy ........243
octane rating ...................242, 262
quality ......................................242
running out of fuel .................243
safety information relating to
automotive fuels .....................239
Fuel pump shut-off switch .......197
Fuses ..................................198–199
G
Garage door opener ....................63
Garage Door Opener
(see Homelink wireless control
system) ........................................77
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) ............241
Gas mileage (see Fuel
economy) ...................................243
Gauges .........................................13
transmission fluid
temperature gauge ...................17
H
Hazard flashers .........................197
Head restraints .........................101
Headlamps ...................................49
aiming ........................................51
autolamp system .......................49
bulb specifications ....................54
daytime running lights .............50
flash to pass ..............................51
high beam .................................50
replacing bulbs ...................55–56
turning on and off ....................49
Heating
heater only system ...................47
heating and air conditioning
system ...........................42–43, 45
Homelink wireless control
system ..........................................77
Hood ..........................................226
I
Ignition ...............................168, 262
Infant seats
(see Safety seats) .....................124
Inspection/maintenance (I/M)
testing ........................................248
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
270
Instrument panel
cleaning ...................................222
cluster ........................................10
lighting up panel and
interior .......................................51
J
Jack ............................................140
positioning ...............................140
storage .....................................140
Jump-starting your vehicle ......204
K
Keyless entry system .................90
Keys
positions of the ignition .........168
L
Lamps
autolamp system .......................49
bulb replacement
specifications chart ..................54
daytime running light ...............50
fog lamps ...................................50
headlamps .................................49
headlamps, flash to pass ..........51
instrument panel, dimming .....51
interior lamps .....................53–55
replacing bulbs .......54–56, 58–59
Lane change indicator
(see Turn signal) ........................52
Liftgate ........................................82
Lights, warning and indicator ....10
anti-lock brakes (ABS) ..........172
speed control ............................72
Load limits .................................156
Loading instructions .................162
Locks
childproof ..................................85
doors ..........................................84
Lubricant specifications ...259, 262
Lug nuts ....................................146
Luggage rack ...............................83
Lumbar support, seats .........98–99
M
Message center ...........................73
english/metric button ...............74
menu button .............................74
Mirrors ...................................62, 66
automatic dimming rearview
mirror ........................................66
fold away ...................................69
heated ........................................67
side view mirrors (power) .......67
signal .........................................68
Motorcraft parts ................243, 255
O
Octane rating ............................242
Oil (see Engine oil) ..................228
Overdrive .....................................62
P
Parking brake ............................173
Parts (see Motorcraft parts) ....255
Pedals (see Power adjustable
foot pedals) .................................70
Power adjustable foot
pedals .....................................70, 98
Power distribution box
(see Fuses) ...............................199
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
271
Power door locks ........................84
Power mirrors .............................67
Power point .................................64
Power steering ..........................174
fluid, checking and adding ....249
fluid, refill capacity ................256
fluid, specifications .........259, 262
Power Windows ...........................65
Preparing to drive your
vehicle ........................................175
R
Radio ......................................17, 21
Relays ........................................198
Remote entry system .................86
illuminated entry ......................89
locking/unlocking doors ...........84
Reverse sensing system ...........182
Roadside assistance ..................196
Roof rack .....................................83
S
Safety Belt Maintenance ..........116
Safety belts (see Safety
restraints) ..........................107–110
Safety defects, reporting ..........218
Safety restraints ................107–110
belt minder .............................112
extension assembly ................116
for adults .........................108–110
for children .....................121–122
lap belt ....................................111
safety belt maintenance .........116
warning light and chime ........112
Safety seats for children ..........124
Seat belts
(see Safety restraints) .............107
Seats ............................................96
child safety seats ....................124
Servicing your vehicle ..............225
Setting the clock
AM/FM/In-dash 6 CD ................23
AM/FM/Tape/CD .......................19
Snowplowing .................................7
Spark plugs,
specifications .....................255, 262
Special notice
diesel-powered vehicles .............6
utility-type vehicles ....................7
Specification chart,
lubricants ...........................259, 262
Speed control ..............................70
Starting your
vehicle ........................168–169, 171
jump starting ..........................204
Steering wheel
controls ......................................73
tilting .........................................61
T
Temperature control
(see Climate control) .................47
Tilt steering wheel ......................61
Tires ...........................134–135, 140
alignment ................................153
care ..........................................152
changing ..........................140, 142
checking the pressure ............137
inspecting and inflating .........136
label .........................................151
replacing ..................................140
rotating ....................................154
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
272
safety practices .......................153
sidewall information ...............146
snow tires and chains ............156
spare tire .................................140
terminology .............................135
tire grades ...............................135
treadwear ........................134, 152
Towing .......................................163
recreational towing .................167
trailer towing ..........................163
wrecker ....................................209
Traction-lok rear axle ...............175
Transfer case
fluid checking .........................253
Transmission .............................176
automatic operation .................62
brake-shift interlock (BSI) ....176
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) .............................250
fluid, refill capacities ..............256
lubricant specifications ..259, 262
Turn signal ..................................52
V
Vehicle dimensions ...................262
Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN)
..........................................264
Vehicle loading
..........................156
Ventilating your vehicle
...........172
W
Warning lights (see Lights)
.......10
Washer fluid
..............................227
Water, Driving through
.............195
Windows
power
.........................................65
rear wiper/washer
.....................60
Windshield washer fluid and
wipers
..........................................60
checking and adding fluid
.....227
liftgate reservoir
.....................228
replacing wiper blades
.............61
Wrecker towing
.........................209
REVIEW COPY
2005 U137 Excursion (hdw), Owners Guide (post-2002-fmt) (own2002),
Market: USA_English (fus)
Index
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
